Home

RETScreen Software Online User Manual

1. CHP 242 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical Costs for Indirect Heating Energy Transfer Station s 2 Y fon uu ov a N e O ETS size kW Typical Costs for Indirect Cooling Energy Transfer Station s 350 000 300 000 250 000 4 200 000 4 150 000 4 Cost per ETS 100 000 50 000 i a ae 0 500 1000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 ETS size kW CHP 243 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Costs for Heating Distribution Line Pipes 5 N V 400 500 600 Pipe size mm 2 500 2 000 1 500 Cost m 1 000 500 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Pipe size mm CHP 244 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Compressor Cooling System Schematic Coons tower Condenser Expansion Compressor valve Evaporator CHP 245 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Absorption Cooling System Schematic Refrigerant vap mdi E f FCooling Separator Evaporator ain load Cooling tower Dry return air to building Inside air Desiccant_ Outside air Wet exhaust air Heater gt wheel Heat Fuel CHP 246 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Reciprocating Engine Schematic Exhaust gas a load Lubricating oil cooler Heating
2. Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the intermediate load heating system The percentage of the heating delivered by the intermediate load heating system over the proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Intermediate load heating system 2 The intermediate load heating system 2 is designed to meet most of the remaining heating demand not met by the base and intermediate load heating system if applicable The intermediate load heating system 2 is particularly useful when the heat recovered from the power equipment does not meet a reasonable portion of the total heating energy demand Type The user selects the type of the intermediate load heating system 2 considered from the drop down list Selecting Not required will hide the entire peak load heating system section Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the intermediate load heating system 2 from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the fuel type of the fuel consumed by the intermediate load heating system 2 CHP 25 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Capacity The user enters the capacity of the intermediate load heating system 2 The System design graph can be used a
3. Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW CHP 81 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambient Temperature Heat recovery efficiency The user enters the heat recovery efficiency of the heat recovery steam generator HRSG or heat recovery system for hot water If the power equipment temperature is too low only part of the heat produced can be recovered Typical values for heat recovery efficiency range from 50 to 80 For a low temperature heating load the higher value can be used and for high temperature heating load the lower value is more suitable If the heat recovery system is for hot water the heat recovery efficiency is typically higher than if it is for steam See the following figure CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the power capacity and heat rate Heating capacity The model calculates the heating capacity of the power equipment based on the power capacity the
4. CHP 130 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required These costs are detailed below Heating equipment The user enters the installed cost per unit capacity for the proposed case heating equipment The capacity in kW or million Btu h is copied automatically from the Energy Model worksheet to the Cost Analysis worksheet This value includes both equipment and installation costs Typically due to economies of scale the larger the capacity the lower the installed cost per unit capacity The user can refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required See the following figure Typical Installed Cost Range Heating Equipment Energy transfer station s The number of buildings and cost of the energy transfer station s is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet Main heating distribution line pipe The total length and cost of the main system piping is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet Secondary heating distribution line pipe The total length and cost of the secondary distribution line pipe is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet Energy efficiency measures The user enters the total installed cost for any additional heating related energy efficiency measur
5. The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the fuel type selected and the model calculates the fuel rate in alternative units CHP 212 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Unit conversion This tool is used to convert one chosen unit to another The conversion is based on the conversion factors in the table Heat rate This tool is used to calculate the heat rate heat recovery efficiency and or the total system efficiency of a Combined Heat and Power CHP plant using three separate methods that are based on various types of information normally available from product suppliers or system designers See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate and Heat Recovery Calculation Efficiency Calculation Power capacity The user enters the power capacity electricity generation of the power equipment Fuel required In Method 1 the user enters the hourly fuel required by the power equipment For Method 2 and 3 the model calculates the hourly fuel required based on the system s heat rate Heating capacity In Method 1 and 2 the user enters the power equipment s heating capacity i e usable thermal output The heating capacity of the power equipment is used to calculate the heat recovery efficiency For Method 3 the heating capacity is calculated from the heat recovery efficiency Distance 0 092903 m 43 560 ft 27 878 400 ft 10 000 m 1000 L 0 01638 L 231 i 4
6. The user selects the type of peak load cooling system considered from the drop down list Selecting Not required will hide the entire peak load cooling system section However if Not required is selected and the Suggested capacity by the model is greater than 0 this section will not hide and the calculations made by the model will not be accurate CHP 70 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel source The model automatically selects the peak load cooling system fuel source For compressors if the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the fuel source For heat pumps if the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the fuel source For absorption and desiccant chillers if the proposed project includes heating the model automatically selects the heating system as the fuel source For free cooling the model automatically sets the fuel source to free cooling Note that the Proposed case system load characteristics graph can be used as a guide Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the peak load cooling system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the peak load cooling
7. 128 131 132 142 143 148 156 157 159 204 223 Cost data errn eE EE EEE 223 Cost reference cecceeecseceeeeeeeeee 12 114 115 Cost reference or Second currency s s 114 Costing method eee eeeeeeseeeecneeeeeeeees 44 57 Country region 0 eee eeeeeeeeeseereeeeceeceeeeeeneeees 173 Cumulative 0 0cccccccecesceceesseccsseseeeens 145 164 Cumulative cash flows graph 145 164 Cren neinn 11 15 116 Currency Options 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 11 Custom 113 115 121 125 128 130 132 133 136 137 143 166 171 173 174 176 178 179 180 181 219 223 Custom 1 to 3 cece ccccceceesseeecseneeeseeeeeeeees 219 Customer premium income rebate 150 152 159 188 D Data amp help access ce eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 15 222 Debt erdan 146 147 158 163 191 Debt interest rate 0 cccceeeesceeeeeeeeees 147 191 Debt payments isansa 147 158 Debt payments debt term eee 158 Debt 1atiosicscsissss ccesecondinieeceveooeebhievs eben 146 191 Debt service coverage 163 Debt termir ne naren e ANES 147 191 Delivery equipment sssssissesseeereeeereseersereere 136 Density eisirean epske has 197 203 Depreciation method seseeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeee 149 Depreciation period sseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeereerreerer 150 Depreciation rate 150 Depreciation tax basis 149 De scripti M sarei an o 8 107 Desiccant Cooling System Schematic 5 69
8. 263 LEG Fuel Potential lt A nda sssini rsss seiis essersi 264 CHP 7 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Brief Description amp Model Flow Chart RETScreen International is a clean energy awareness decision support and capacity building tool The core of the tool consists of a standardised and integrated clean energy project analysis software that can be used world wide to evaluate the energy production life cycle costs and greenhouse gas emission reductions for various types of energy efficient and renewable energy technologies RETs Each RETScreen technology model e g Combined Heat amp Power Project etc is developed within an individual Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Workbook file The Workbook file is in turn composed of a series of worksheets These worksheets have a common look and follow a standard approach for all RETScreen models In addition to the software the tool includes product weather and cost databases an online manual a Website an engineering textbook project case studies and a training course Model flow chart Complete each worksheet row by row from top to bottom by entering values in shaded cells To move between worksheets simply click on the tabs at the bottom of each screen or on the blue underlined hyperlinks built into the worksheets as presented in the RETScreen Model Flow Chart Five Step Standard Analysis Sensitivity amp Risk Analysis k ick on blue hyperlinks r
9. 74 76 237 Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency 6 91 96 100 250 Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperatures 200 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 88 93 249 U Unit conversion ceesceesceesceeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeneee 213 UMIt OPNS eis ei srest enie ea Eis 12 Unit Options amp Fuel Value Reference 15 Units 12 142 173 175 176 177 179 181 182 183 184 197 200 203 204 208 210 211 Units symbols amp prefixes eese 12 User defined fuel 196 197 200 User defined fuel gas wo ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeees 200 User defined fuel solid 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 197 W Waste disposal benchmark years 6 205 Waste disposal rate 0 cess eeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 205 Water amp steams en aaa 218 Water temperature eeseeesseeseeesesrrerrsrrerseeee 218 Weather datas icscccccssssssiecsentescevesevaveerseaetes 222 Weather Database Map csseeeeee 4 222 224 Wind t rbin senene 103 Y Year landfill opened eee eee eseeeeeneeeeeeee 205 Year Of Change ooo reee aar ai Ti 177 Yearly cash flows ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 145 163 Years Of occurrence eeeeeceeeceeeeeeteeeeeneeeeee 182 CHP 277 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Notes CHP 278 www retscreen net
10. Afghanistan and the third letter to the name of the currency A for Afghani Some currency symbols may be unclear on the screen e g this is caused by the zoom settings of the sheet The user can then increase the zoom to see those symbols correctly Usually symbols will be fully visible on printing even if not fully appearing on the screen display Metric or Imperial units To perform a RETScreen project analysis the user must choose between Metric units or Imperial units by clicking on the appropriate radio button The user should not change this selection once the analysis has started If the user selects Metric all output values will be expressed in metric units But if the user selects Imperial output values will be expressed in Imperial units where applicable In the Equipment Selection worksheet both types of units can be shown simultaneously by ticking the Show alternative units check box Note that if the user switches between Metric and Imperial input values will not be automatically transformed into the equivalent selected units The user must select the units preferred for each input cell and ensure that values entered in input cells are expressed in the units shown Project name The user defined project name is given for reference purposes only Project location The user defined project location is given for reference purposes only Higher or Lower heating value The user must choose betw
11. CH emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ CHP 203 RETScreen Software Online User Manual N20 emission factor The user enters the nitrous oxide N20 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ Note At this point the user should return to the Equipment Selection worksheet Landfill gas This tool is used to define the Landfill gas fuel selected by the user from the Fuel type list in the Equipment Selection worksheet The landfill gas LFG may be collected from a nearby landfill via an existing LFG collection system at the landfill or through the construction of a new LFG collection system The user enters the cost for the new LFG collection system in the Cost Analysis worksheet Landfill gas is generated by the biological decomposition of wastes placed in a landfill The composition of landfill gas is highly variable and depends on a number of site specific conditions including solid waste composition density moisture content and age The specific composition of landfill gas varies significantly from landfill to landfill and even from place to place within a single landfill However landfill gas is typica
12. CHP 118 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Preliminary design A preliminary design is required in order to determine the optimum plant capacity the size and layout of the structures and equipment and the estimated construction quantities necessary for the detailed cost estimate As with site investigations the scope of this task is often reduced for small projects in order to reduce costs Consequently additional contingencies should be allowed to account for the resulting additional risk of cost overruns during construction The cost of the preliminary design is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by an expert to complete the necessary work The cost of professional services required to complete a preliminary design will range between 300 and 1 000 per person day As with site investigations the time required to complete the preliminary design will depend to a large extend on the size of the project and corresponding acceptable level of risk The number of person days required can range between 2 and 20 Detailed cost estimate The detailed cost estimate for the proposed case project is based on the results of the preliminary design and other investigations carried out during the feasibility study The cost of preparing the detailed cost estimate is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by an expert to complete the necessary work Engineering services for completing a CHP project det
13. in the form of cold water ice slurry or brine solution is distributed from the central cooling plant to the individual buildings The thermal energy is distributed using networks of uninsulated or insulated underground arterial pipeline main distribution line and branch pipelines secondary distribution lines The network can either be designed as a branched system as shown in the Community System Building Cluster Layout or as a looped system This figure shows how the different building clusters are connected to the main distribution line i e section 1 2 etc Note that the office building cluster 4 and the apartment building cluster 5 are not put in the same building cluster as they have different cooling loads If they are put together the secondary pipe size will be incorrect The Community System Base Case Cooling System and Cooling Load table provides a summary of the cooling loads and pipe lengths for the building clusters shown in the Community System Building Cluster Layout Cooled floor area for per building zone cluster Cooled floor area for building The user enters the total cooled floor space for the building For process cooling only this value is entered for reference purposes only Cooled floor area per building zone The user enters the total cooled floor space per building zone A building zone is any number of similar sections of a building connected to a single point of the distribution syste
14. load Gas Turbine Schematic Exhaust gas DEd is CHP 247 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Gas Turbine Combined Cycle Schematic Feed water Back pressure port Condenser Steam Turbine Schematic Heating Heating load load Exhaust gas Steam turbine Extraction port Back pressure port Heating Heating load load Condenser CHP 248 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel Cell Schematic Typical Reciprocating Engine Power Capacity Power capacity Type nee speed Medium speed High speed lt 275 RPM 275 1 000 RPM 1 000 3 600 RPM lL PE spark a 10kW 15 MW foaigiion tone sonnei spark ignition 1 6 MW 150 kW 3 MW Dual fuel 2 65 MW 1 25 MW 1MW 3 5 MW Diesel Oil 6 2 65 MW 0 5 35 MW 10kW 3 5 MW Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperatures Type Power capacity Operating pressure Temperature Steam turbine 0 1 2 MW 1 000 2 000 kPa Saturation low power capacity 150 250 psig Steam turbine 4 000 21 000 kPa Superheated high power capacity 600 3 000 psig 330 700 C 625 1 300 F Gas turbine 2 100 MW 4 000 5 600 kPa Superheated combined cycle 600 800 psig 400 C 750 F CHP 249 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency Operating pressure 5 000kW 10 000kKW 15 000kW 2 250 psig 17 2bar 74 3 766 850 psig 58 6bar 74
15. or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Contingencies A contingency allowance should be included to account for unforeseen annual expenses and will depend on the level of accuracy of the operation and maintenance cost estimate section This is especially true in the case of project in isolated areas It is common to carry a contingency allowance for at least the replacement of the most expensive component subject to catastrophic failure The contingency allowance is calculated based on an estimated percentage of the other operation and maintenance costs It typically ranges from 10 to 20 of these costs Fuel The fuel consumption quantity and fuel rate unit cost are calculated in the Energy Model Load amp Network and Equipment Selection worksheets and these values are automatically copied to the Cost Analysis worksheet If the same fuel is used for different types of equipment the model will display this fuel type only once in the Cost Analysis worksheet and the total fuel consumption and fuel cost will be calculated by the model Electricity fuel refers to energy supplied by the electricity grid for the proposed case system CHP 143 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Periodic costs credits This section is provided to allow the user to specify the periodic costs associated with the o
16. organisation may have multiple required rates of return that will vary according to the perceived risk of the projects The most obvious advantage of using the internal rate of return indicator to evaluate a project is that the outcome does not depend on a discount rate that is specific to a given organisation Instead the IRR obtained is specific to the project and applies to all investors in the project CHP 160 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Pre tax Internal Rate of Return assets The model calculates the pre tax internal rate of return on assets which represents the true interest yield provided by the project assets over its life before income tax It is calculated using the pre tax yearly cash flows and the project life It is also referred to as the return on assets ROA It is calculated by finding the discount rate that causes the net present value of the assets to be equal to zero Hence it is not necessary to establish the discount rate of an organisation to use this indicator An organisation interested in a project can compare the internal rate of return to its required rate of return often the cost of capital The IRR is calculated on a nominal basis that is including inflation After tax Internal Rate of Return equity The model calculates the after tax internal rate of return on equity which represents the true interest yield provided by the project equity over its life after income t
17. section at the bottom of this worksheet Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year See the following figure CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation CHP 108 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Heat recovery efficiency The user enters the heat recovery efficiency of the heat recovery system If the power equipment temperature is too low only part of the heat produced can be recovered See the following figure CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the power capacity
18. 156 Project fimancing eeceeceseeeseeseeereeeeeeeeees 124 Project lifes c ccna eee 146 208 Project location ee eeeeecseeeeceeeseeeeeneteeeeaees 16 Project management 0 0 0 eee 120 125 Project Name nere inne ea 16 Propane nsicisen doen nase tate wales 201 Property taxes wo cece E RE 140 Proposed case cooling system s s s 68 Proposed case district cooling network 49 54 Proposed Case District Cooling Network 5 240 Proposed case district heating network 35 40 Proposed Case District Heating Network 5 240 Proposed case energy efficiency measures 39 53 64 Proposed case GHG emission s eeeee 183 Proposed case heating system eeee 72 Proposed case load and demand 0 66 Proposed case load characteristics 39 53 64 65 Proposed case power system ou eee 79 Proposed case system characteristics 17 Proposed case system GHG summary Project OE E S E E 165 179 Proposed case system load characteristics graph PE E E E E EEN 66 68 69 71 Proposed case system summiaty 32 153 Proposed project cece esse cee cseeereeeee 15 17 Proximate analysis 198 201 R Range of k Values by Annual Precipitation 7 206 261 Rate Ist currency 2nd Currency 114 Reason event for baseline change 177 Reciprocating engine ee eeeeeseeeeeeeee 80 220 CHP 275 RETScreen Software Online Use
19. 54609 L 1 728 in 42 US gal 1000 kg 0 4536 kg 100 kPa 14 5038 psia 101 3250 kPa 760 0000 mm Hg 0 C 29 9213 inHg 0 C 10 3323 mH20 4 C 33 8986 ftH20 4 C CF 32 1 8 C 18432 273 15 C 429 9226 Btu lb 238 8459 kcalkg kg kWh tMWh kg GJ Ib million Btu 0 3170 Buf 37 855 0889 ft RT 0 0264 RT 1000 ft Conversion Factors CHP 213 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heat rate In Method 1 the heat rate is calculated from the fuel required divided by the power capacity For Method 2 and 3 the user enters the heat rate Heat recovery efficiency In Method 1 and 2 the heat recovery efficiency is calculated from the heating capacity the power capacity and the fuel required For Method 3 the user enters the heat recovery efficiency to calculate the heating capacity Efficiency In Method 1 the model calculates the total system efficiency of a Combined Heat and Power CHP plant by dividing the recovered energy from the fuel for power and heating by the fuel required Electricity rate time of use This tool is used to determine the average electricity rate based on information from a time of use electricity bill The user enters values for peak and off peak rates for two different seasons and for weekdays or weekends during the day and or at night The user enters the rate structure and estimated average load for the different periods The model then calculates the to
20. As an example the heat loss is approximately 58 W m for a two pipe system of a DN125 pipes using an average annual supply temperature of 100 C and an average annual return temperature of 50 C The capacity is 3 400 kW for a DN125 pipe assuming a temperature difference of 45 C Additional information may be obtained from the District Heating Handbook Randl v 1997 Heating pipe design criteria Design supply temperature The user enters the design supply temperature for the district heating network Typically plastic pipes are smaller than DN100 100 mm or 4 and have a maximum temperature rating of 95 C steel pipes are typically rated up to 130 C If a mixed plastic and steel system is designed the rating for the plastic pipes governs the maximum water CHP 40 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model temperature allowable A minimum design supply temperature of 70 C is typically required for supplying heat to domestic hot water Refer to the Typical District Heating Supply and Return Temperatures graph for more information Medium Temperature MT supply is typical for steel pipe systems Low Temperature LT supply is typical for plastic pipe or mixed type systems High temperature district heating systems are very rare and typically use supply temperatures that are well above temperatures shown in the graph i e about 150 C Design return temperature The user enters the design return temperature for the
21. Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW 22 61 81 86 235 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW 22 61 82 86 236 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW 22 61 81 86 235 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW 22 61 81 86 236 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW issceccuseistoueeneie 4 22 61 81 84 86 232 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW scce 4 22 61 81 84 86 233 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW eee 22 61 81 84 86 234 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW shania 4 22 61 81 84 86 232 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW eec 4 22 61 81 84 86 233 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW oseese 22 61 81 84 86 234 Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines HHV lt 6MW eccerre 22 61 231 Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines EHV lt 6MW Jenisi asrneae 22 61 231 Typical Installed Cost Range Cooling Eguipment iera 7 132 259 Typical Installed Cost Range Heating Equipment 7 131 259 Typical Installed Cost Range Power Equipment ERE E T 7 129 259 Typical Reciprocating Engine Power Capacity 6 80 249 Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling SYSLEMS en na na 5 50 70 72 237 Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems 0 eeeeeeeeee 5 26 28 37
22. Heat pump ground source or 400 to 4 000 for vertical well Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Major equipment Major installation 120 to 400 25 to 60 for cooling tower Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Air cooled condenser heat exchanger Cooling tower Major equipment Major installation Note Typical installed cost values in Canadian as of January 1 2005 Approximate exchange rate at time was CAD 0 62 EUR in Slatent kW 100 to 500 Fuel connections storage 1 CAD 0 81 USD and 1 CHP 259 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Registration Fees for CDM Projects Average tonnes of COze reductions year lt 15 000 5 000 gt 15 000 and lt 50 000 10 000 gt 50 000 and lt 100 000 15 000 gt 100 000 and lt 200 000 20 000 Registration fee in US gt 200 000 Factor Type of grid Mini grid with 24 hour service 30 000 Emission Factors for Diesel Generator Systems in kgCO2equ kWh for Three Different Levels of Load i Mini grid with 4 to 6 hour service ii Productive applications Mini grid with storage iii Water pumps 50 100 gt 135to lt 200kW o9 fos fe gt 200Kw dos fos fe A conversion factor of 3 2 kg CO per kg of diesel has been used following revised 1996 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories Figures are derived from fuel curves in
23. Index A Absorption Cooling System Schematic 5 69 246 Accuracy of Project Cost Estimates 6 114 255 Actual steam rate ASR ce 91 96 100 APftOL taX men irn a 161 163 185 186 After tax Internal Rate of Return assets 161 After tax Internal Rate of Return equity 161 Annual costs Credits cccccsseeseceseeeeseees 140 Annual costs and debt payments 00 158 Annual fuel cost summary s es 145 Annual income cccceccccesseeeeeseeeeens 145 150 Annual life cycle savings 162 Annual O amp M cost oes eeceeeceseceeeceneeneeeeeenee 62 Annual savings and income cesses 159 As fired flelesc cc08 nies aavnceisbie aie 211 ASH 2 hitniainck shed E aaa 199 Avala bility siri ni eea as 21 79 Average loadin esisi sisis 215 217 B Back pressure cceseceeseeeereeeneeeeee 90 95 100 Back up cooling system optional 29 31 Back up heating system optional 23 28 Back up power system optional 18 22 Balance of system amp miscellaneous 133 158 Bar Staph ccicict dieiceeditveciattvaceseckesetecieueteanhens 195 Base case cooling system cesses 48 49 Base Case Cooling System 5 49 240 241 Base case electricity system Baseline 165 171 Base case GHG emission eseseeeeeeeeeees 183 Base case heating system 34 35 Base Case Heating System 5 35 239 241 Base cas
24. Model worksheet CHP 29 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Type The user selects the base load cooling system type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Fuel source Fuel type The user selects the base load cooling system fuel source or fuel type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Capacity The user enters the capacity of the base load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the base load cooling system capacity over the proposed case cooling system peak load is calculated Cooling delivered The model calculates the cooling delivered by the base load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the cooling delivered by the base load cooling system over the proposed case cooling system energy demand is also calculated Peak load cooling system The user enters the information about the peak load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Type The user selects the peak load cooling system type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Fuel source Fuel type The user selects the peak l
25. Online User Manual Steam Turbine Installed Cost Examples Power capacity kW 500 3 000 15 000 Back pressure quipment cost kW 550 325 300 0 9 761 57 204 204 300 Operating pressure bar 49 3 uperheated temperature C 8 343 4 otal installed cost f k W 1 313 569 525 11 3 emperature at back pressure port C 186 urbine efficiency 47 0 65 8 77 6 Fuel Cell Installed Cost Examples Fuel cell type PAFC PEMFC PEMFC merc MCFC sorct IPAFC Phosphoric acid fuel cell PEMFC Proton exchange membrane fuel cell 3MICFC Molten carbonate fuel cell SOFC Solid oxide fuel cell Estimated Transmission Line Costs Capacity Voltage Cost perkm Distance MW kV km km Estimated Substation Costs Capacity Voltage Substation MW kV CHP 258 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical Installed Cost Range Power Equipment RETScreen power equipment type Typical installed cost kW Steam turbine Note Typical installed cost values in Canadian as of January 1 2005 Approximate exchange rate at time was 1 CAD 0 81 USD and 1 CAD 0 62 EUR 1 800 to 2 100 Typical Installed Cost Range Heating Equipment Typical installed cost S kWheating RETScreen heating equipment type Included in cost Not included im cost Major equipment Major installation Major equipment Major installation 1001 400 800 to 1 500 600 to 1 500 2
26. Proposed case The model calculates the annual average amount of landfill gas flared in the proposed case scenario during the energy project life This is the annual average amount of landfill gas generated from waste in the landfill site collected by the landfill gas collection system but not used as fuel by the proposed case energy project and therefore is instead flared CO emission factor The user enters the carbon dioxide CO2 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ For landfill gas fuels it is reasonable to assume that this value will be equal to zero for the purpose of preparing a greenhouse gas analysis CH emission factor The user enters the methane CH emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ In the absence of project specific data a value of 0 0036 for HHV and 0 0040 for LHV provides a reasonable first estimate CHP 210 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model N20 emission factor The user enters the nitrous oxide N20 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajou
27. Refer to the Gas Turbine Combined Cycle Schematic for more information Power capacity GT The user enters the power capacity of the gas turbine GT The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity GT over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel Typical minimum capacity for gas turbines is 40 CHP 85 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more informa
28. Reference Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered CQ2 CH and N2O emission factors Standard analysis The model provides the CO2 CH and NO emission factors corresponding to the fuel types If one of the fuel types is electricity the emission factor for the base case electricity system is used CO CH and N O emission factors represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of equipment For each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of energy generated kg GJ For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N2O emission CHP 178 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model factors for a number of fuels are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC Reference Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered Fuel consumption The model calculates the total fuel consumption for each fuel type This value is used in
29. The longer the horizontal bar for a given input parameter the greater is the impact of the input parameter on the variability of the financial indicator The input parameters are automatically sorted by their impact on the financial indicator CHP 192 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The input parameter at the top Y axis contributes the most to the variability of the financial indicator while the input parameter at the bottom contributes the least This tornado graph will help the user determine which input parameters should be considered for a more detailed analysis if that is required The direction of the horizontal bar positive or negative provides an indication of the relationship between the input parameter and the financial indicator There is a positive relationship between an input parameter and the financial indicator when an increase in the value of that parameter results in an increase in the value of the financial indicator For example there is usually a negative relationship between initial costs and the Net Present Value NPV since decreasing the initial costs will increase the NPV In some cases there is insufficient data to properly plot the graph For example when the equity payback is immediate the result is the n a symbol and therefore these values cannot be plotted If the user makes any changes to the input range values or navigates through any of the other worksheets the Cl
30. a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Power system The power system as defined here includes the base load intermediate load peak load and or back up power equipment and the associated road construction transmission line substation and power related energy efficiency measures costs The user can refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required These costs are detailed below Power equipment The user enters the installed cost per unit capacity for the proposed case power equipment The capacity in kW is copied automatically from the Energy Model worksheet to the Cost Analysis worksheet This value includes both equipment and CHP 128 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model installation costs Typically due to economies of scale the larger the capacity the lower the installed cost per unit capacity The user can refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required See one of the following figures Typical Installed Cost Range Power Equipment Reciprocating Engine Installed Cost Examples Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples lt SMW Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 5 to 5 0MW Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 50 to 300MW Steam Turbine Installed Co
31. a sensitivity analysis of the important financial indicators If the user ticks the box the sensitivity analysis section will open Risk analysis The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not the optional risk analysis section is used to conduct a risk analysis of the important financial indicators In the risk analysis section the impact of each input parameter on a financial indicator is obtained by applying a standardised multiple linear regression on the financial indicator If the user ticks the box the risk analysis section will open Sensitivity analysis for This section presents the results of the sensitivity analysis Each table shows what happens to the selected financial indicator e g After tax IRR equity when two key parameters e g Initial costs and O amp M are varied by the indicated percentages The user indicates from the drop down list which parameters will be varied together Parameters are varied using the following fraction of the sensitivity range 1 1 2 0 1 2 1 Original values which appear in the Financial Summary worksheet are in bold in these sensitivity analysis results tables Results which indicate an unviable project as defined by the user Threshold will appear as orange cells in these sensitivity analysis results tables CHP 185 RETScreen Software Online User Manual All parameter values used for the calculations are taken from the Financial Summary worksheet and al
32. and heat rate Heating capacity The model calculates the heating capacity of the power equipment based on the power capacity the heat rate and the heat recovery efficiency The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Operating strategy The operating strategy section is used to help determine the optimal operating strategy for the selected power system Note that this method is only an indicator of the profitability of the selected system The values calculated for the selected operating strategy in the Equipment Selection worksheet are displayed in bold and are copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Fuel rate base case heating system The model calculates the fuel rate price per MWh of fuel for the base case heating system based on values entered in the Load amp Network worksheet Electricity rate base case The model calculates the electricity rate for the base case system based on values entered in the Load amp Network worksheet CHP 109 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Fuel rate proposed case power system The model calculates the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the proposed case power system either base load or intermediate
33. and main distribution pipes and the total cost of the energy transfer station s Cooling project Site conditions Nearest location for weather data The user enters the weather station location with the most representative weather conditions for the project This is for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information Cooling design temperature The user enters the cooling design temperature in Celsius degrees which represents the maximum temperature that has been measured for a frequency level of at least 1 over the year for a specific area ASHRAE 1997 The cooling design temperature is used to determine the cooling demand The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information Typical values for cooling design temperature range from approximately 10 to 47 C If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displayed Note The cooling design temperature values found in the RETScreen Online Weather Database were calculated based on hourly data for 12 months of the year The user might want to overwrite this value depending on local conditions For example where temperatures are measured at airports the cooling design temperature could be 1 to 2 C warmer in core areas of large cities The user should be aware that if they choose to modify the cooling design temperature the monthly d
34. and steam These values are calculated using The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam Release on the IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of Water and Steam Entropy and enthalpy for a fluid stage are calculated using Equation 7 and for a vapour stage using Equation 15 18 and 19 both as a function of pressure and temperature Finally the saturation temperature is calculated using Equation 31 as a function of pressure Water temperature The user enters the water temperature and the model calculates the enthalpy at the selected temperature in kJ kg Enthalpy difference The model calculates the enthalpy difference for the two selected vapor states in kJ kg Steam pressure The user enters the steam pressure Saturation temperature The model calculates the steam saturation temperature The saturation temperature is the boiling point at the selected steam pressure Steam temperature The user enters the steam temperature and the model calculates the enthalpy at the selected temperature in kJ kg If superheated steam is not considered enter the saturation temperature GHG equivalence This tool is used to compare the Net annual GHG emission reduction with units that are easier to conceptualise e g Cars amp light trucks not used using the drop down list These numbers are based on North American energy use patterns The user can compare the Net annual GHG emissi
35. and the electrical interconnection with the existing electrical grid For instance the interconnection study will address all safety aspects related to the addition of a new production source on the grid as well as analyse the impact with respect to the quality of the power delivered The level of effort will be influenced by the availability of appropriate design information from the equipment supplier and interconnection requirements from the utility CHP 126 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The cost of the electrical engineering should be based on an estimate of the time required by experts to complete the necessary work It can involve between 5 and 300 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 depending upon the scale and complexity of the project As an example CHP plants in the 50 to 100 MW scale range will be at the high end of this range while a small system might require a much lower effort of approximately 5 to 15 person days Civil design The principal civil engineering tasks will be associated with design and planning of construction of the buildings foundations access roads and other on ground systems The level of effort will be influenced by the availability of approved design information from the suppliers and site specific information regarding access soil conditions surface drainage and other physical conditions The cost of the civil engineering should be based on an estimate of th
36. applying the specified change in emission factor to the weighted GHG emission factor of the electricity mix Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco2 MWh which are equivalent Reason event for baseline change The user enters the reason for the baseline change i e the event that triggers the change in the baseline This information is given for reference purposes only For example if the addition of a new hydro plant is the reason for the change in the baseline the user would enter something like New hydro plant under construction Base case system GHG summary Baseline The base case system or baseline system represents the system to which the proposed case system is compared The base case system is normally referred to as the reference or baseline option in standard economic analysis Fuel type The user enters the fuel types in the Load amp Network worksheet or in the Base case electricity system section for fuel type electricity and they are copied automatically to the GHG Analysis worksheet If the same fuel type is used for several building zones or clusters or for both heating and cooling the model will display this fuel type only once in the GHG Analysis worksheet and the total fuel consumption will be calculated by the model Note that if electricity is exported to the grid in the proposed case this electricity is also added to the base case system so that the GHG
37. at which the undepreciated capital cost of the project is depreciated each year The depreciation rate can vary widely according to the class of assets considered and the jurisdiction in which the project is located Depreciation period The user enters the depreciation period year which is the period over which the project capital costs are depreciated using a constant rate The depreciation period can vary widely according to the class of assets considered and the jurisdiction in which the project is located Tax holiday available The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not the project can benefit from a tax holiday If the user selects Yes the tax holiday applies starting in the first year of operation year 1 up to the tax holiday duration The income tax calculation for the development construction year year 0 is not affected Tax holiday duration The user enters the tax holiday duration year which is the number of years over which the tax holiday applies starting in the first year of operation year 1 For example in India certain renewable energy projects are given a five year tax holiday Annual income Customer premium income rebate The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not customer premium income or rebate is applicable If the user ticks the box certain input fields will be added to allow the user to customise the customer premium income rebate analysis according to
38. available through the local electric utility the utility regulator and or through government For example the United States Environmental Protection Agency US EPA provides The Emissions amp Generation Resource Integrated Database called E GRID This is a database featuring environmental characteristics of electric power generation in the US including fuel mix This database is available free of charge at the E GRID Website To illustrate this alternative analysis method for a grid connected project based in Nova Scotia Canada the provincial government might determine the baseline to be the weighted average of the current electricity generation mix This can be calculated by simply entering the current fuel mix into the grid along with the appropriate emissions coefficient For this example and with information provided by Natural Resources Canada the user would select the following fuel types and associated fuel mix coal with 78 of the fuel mix large hydro with 9 6 oil with 5 natural gas with 5 and biomass with 3 of the fuel mix and T amp D losses of 8 for all fuel types Note that this methodology can be used for small scale CDM renewable energy projects that are connected to a grid that includes generating units other than diesel or fuel oil Some users may prefer to perform a much more detailed analysis of the GHG reduction potential of the project e g an economist working for a public utility commission The model allows f
39. average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel Typical minimum capacity for gas turbines is 40 Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only CHP 83 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation ef
40. be paid for in the second currency This value is based on the exchange rate and the CHP 116 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model percentage of an item s cost that will be paid for in the second currency as specified by the user Initial costs credits The initial costs associated with the implementation of the project are detailed below The major categories include costs for preparing a feasibility study performing the project development functions completing the necessary engineering purchasing and installing the energy power heating and or cooling equipment construction of the balance of system and costs for any other miscellaneous items Feasibility study Once a potential cost effective proposed case project has been identified through the RETScreen pre feasibility analysis process a more detailed feasibility analysis study is often required This is particularly the case for large projects Feasibility studies typically include such items as a site investigation a resource assessment an environmental assessment a preliminary project design a detailed cost estimate a GHG baseline study and a monitoring plan and a final report Feasibility study project management and travel costs are also normally incurred These costs are detailed below Feasibility studies typically cost about 5 of the total project cost For small projects the cost of the more detailed feasibility study relative to the cost of
41. by the equipment supplier or the project manager Construction supervision involves full time presence at the job site to inspect the installation Construction supervision will involve between 0 to 2 person years at a rate of between 150 000 and 200 000 per person year depending on the duration of the project construction schedule For example the installation of a packaged gas turbine in the 60 kW range micro turbine should not require more than 0 02 person year 7 days of supervision Travel time to the site for construction supervision is in addition to the range given Travels costs should be included in the Development section Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both
42. cells produce electricity for the power load using an electrochemical process Heat can be recovered from the chemical exothermic reaction Refer to the Fuel Cell Schematic and Fuel Cell Characteristics table for more information Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load CHP 101 RETScreen Software Online User Manual for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel Typical minimum capacity for fuel cells is 25 for power capacity over 10 kW and 35 for power capacity less than 10 kW Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operatin
43. choose to remove existing boilers and domestic hot water storage tanks to gain valuable floor space Each energy transfer station consists of prefabricated heat exchanger units for space heating domestic hot water heating and process heating The energy transfer station is provided with the necessary control equipment as well as all the internal piping The energy transfer station is designed for ease of connection to the building s internal heating and hot water system Domestic hot water tanks and boilers are typically replaced with only a heat exchanger Where the domestic hot water consumption is large storage tanks can be used Typically each building includes an energy meter These meters record district heating water flow through the energy transfer station By measuring the temperature difference of incoming and return water temperature the energy usage is calculated Prefabricated energy transfer stations with heat exchanger units for both heating and domestic hot water are available for single family residences and small multi family residences They consist of brazed plate or shell and tube heat exchangers for both heating and domestic hot water a circulation pump an expansion tank self actuating control valves and an energy meter For larger buildings the energy transfer station will be site assembled but will consist of the equipment with the same functions as for smaller buildings CHP 45 RETScreen Software Onlin
44. condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Lower heating value LHV The model calculates the lower heating value of the fuel using Delong s formula for fossil fuel and a modified Delong formula for biomass fuel CHP 199 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Fuel consumption unit The user selects the fuel consumption unit Fuel rate unit The model displays the fuel rate unit CO emission factor The user enters the carbon dioxide CO2 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ Note that the model also calculates the CO emission factor based on the proximate analysis and this value is shown to the right of the entry cell However for biomass fuels it is reasonable to assume that this value will be equal to zero for the purpose of preparing a greenhouse
45. content of a substance Entropy The model calculates the entropy of the steam at the input of the steam turbine Entropy is a general measure of the thermodynamic potential of a system Extraction port The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not an extraction port is included Extraction ports are used to provide heat to a heating load at a higher grade than available from the back pressure port Maximum extraction The user enters the maximum extraction as a percentage of the steam flow The maximum allowable steam extraction varies depending on the equipment manufacturer and model Extraction The model calculates the amount of steam that can be extracted based on the maximum extraction and the steam flow CHP 94 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Extraction pressure The user enters the steam turbine extraction pressure The higher the extraction pressure is the higher the heating capacity is at the extraction port and the lower the power capacity is and vice versa Temperature The model calculates the temperature of the extracted steam which is the saturation temperature at the extraction pressure Mixture quality The model calculates steam moisture mixture quality at the output of the extraction port If the mixture quality is below 1 0 the steam contains water i e the steam is wet Typically a steam turbine requires a minimum mixture quality in the rang
46. costs performance and risks to enable project investors and other decision makers to evaluate the merits of the project The cost of the report preparation is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by an expert to complete the necessary work Preparing a feasibility study report will involve between 2 and 15 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 per person day Project management The project management cost item should cover the estimated costs of managing all phases of the feasibility study for the project including the time required for stakeholder consultations Consultations with the stakeholders in a given project are called for in order to build support and collaboration toward the project and to identify any opposition at the earliest stage of development The cost of the management of the feasibility study is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by an expert to complete the necessary work It will involve between 2 and 8 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 per person day In addition the time required to present the project to the stakeholders should not exceed an additional 3 person days travel time must also be added CHP 120 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Travel amp accommodation This cost item includes all travel related costs excluding time required to prepare all sections of the feasibility study by the various members of the feasibil
47. distribution system Note When the user enters 0 or leaves the heated floor area per building zone cell blank the remaining cells of the column in this section are hidden For process heating only this value is entered for reference purposes only but it has to be entered for each building zone considered in order to enter inputs in the remaining cells of the column Heated floor area per building cluster The user enters the total heated floor space per building cluster A building cluster is any number of similar buildings connected to a single point of the distribution system The user obtains this value for each of the buildings included in the heating system and summarises the values to enter the cluster total heated floor area see Technical note on heating network design Note When the user enters 0 or leaves the heated floor area per building cluster cell blank the remaining cells of the column in this section are hidden For process heating only this value is entered for reference purposes only but it has to be entered for each building cluster considered in order to enter inputs in the remaining cells of the column Number of buildings in building cluster The user enters the number of buildings in each building cluster Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the base case heating system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet
48. down list cell in the Cost Analysis worksheet Some currency symbols may be unclear on the screen e g this is caused by the zoom settings of the sheet The user can increase the zoom to see those symbols correctly Usually symbols will be fully visible on printing even if not fully appearing on the screen display Units symbols amp prefixes The previous table presents a list of units symbols and prefixes that are used in the RETScreen model Unit options To perform a RETScreen project analysis the user must choose between Metric units or Imperial units by clicking on the appropriate radio button The user should not change this selection once the analysis has started If the user selects Metric all output values will be expressed in metric units But if the user selects Imperial output values will be expressed in imperial units where applicable In the Equipment Selection worksheet both types of units can be shown simultaneously by ticking the Show alternative units check box Note that if the user switches between Metric and Imperial input values will not be automatically converted into the equivalent selected units The user must select the units preferred for each input cells and ensure that values entered in input cells are expressed in the units shown Language options To perform a RETScreen project analysis the user may select a language from the Language Langue cell in the Energy Model worksh
49. each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ For the global electricity mix shown on the bottom row of the table units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of end use electricity delivered For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N O emission factors for a number of fuels are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC Reference Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered CQO2 CH and N2O emission factors Standard analysis The model provides the CO CH and N O emission factors which represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of power plants The default factors provided are those which are representative of large power plants that feed a central electricity grid On the electricity mix row at the bottom of the table the model calculates the equivalent emission factors for the total electricity mix and per unit of electricity delivered The electricity mix factors thus account for a weighted average of the fuel c
50. emissions for this generation are included in the comparison For projects using landfill gas as a fuel the GHG emissions from the landfill site or existing flare are also included in the baseline calculations CHP 177 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Fuel mix The fuel mix of the base case system is calculated automatically from the consumption of different fuel types as defined in the Load amp Network worksheet and in the Operating strategy section in the Equipment Selection worksheet if electricity is exported to the grid CQ2 CH and N2O emission factors Custom analysis The user enters the CO2 CH and N O emission factors corresponding to the fuel types If one of the fuel types is electricity the emission factor for the base case electricity system is used CO CH and N O emission factors represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of equipment For each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of energy generated kg GJ For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N O emission factors for a number of fuels are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC
51. equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year The heat rate for gas turbines varies also depending on the location i e altitude humidity and temperature See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 M Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW
52. floating icon to access data Project Cash Flows RETScreen Model Flow Chart CHP 8 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model CHP model flow chart Complete each worksheet row by row from top to bottom by entering values in shaded cells To move between worksheets simply click on the tabs at the bottom of each screen or on the blue underlined hyperlinks built into the worksheets as presented in the RETScreen CHP Model Flow Chart Step One of Five Step Analysis Complete each worksheet row by row from top to bottom by entering values in shaded cells Energy Model Worksheet click on blue hyperlinks to access STA RT next worksheet databases or other features Load amp Network Design Equipment Selection Tools Sub Worksheet Sub Worksheet Worksheet f ens mee mee gt Cost Analysis GHG Analysis Financial Sensitivity amp Risk Worksheet Worksheet Summary Analysis raa make Optional Worksheet Worksheet a decision Optional RETScreen International RETScreen CHP Model Flow Chart Data amp help access The RETScreen Online User Manual Product Database and Weather Database can be accessed through the Excel menu bar under the RETScreen option as shown in the following figure The icons displayed under the RETScreen menu bar are displayed in the floating RETScreen toolbar Hence the user may also access the online use
53. for a particular purpose or that the use of the software will not infringe any intellectual property rights of third parties In no event will Natural Resources Canada nor its minister officers employees or agents have any obligations or liability arising from tort or for loss of revenue or profit or for indirect special incidental or consequential damages as a result of your use of the software In consideration of the right to load execute and use RETScreen International the recipient Licensee shall indemnify and save harmless Natural Resources Canada Licensor and its employees and agents from and against and shall be responsible for all claims demands losses costs including solicitor and client costs damages actions suits or proceedings arising out of related to or occasioned by any use of RETScreen International by the Licensee The Licensor shall have the right to defend any such action or proceeding with counsel of its own selection Copyright amp trademark The RETScreen International Clean Energy Project Analysis Software and the accompanying manual and databases are copyright of the Minister of Natural Resources Canada 1997 2005 Duplication in any manner is forbidden without prior written permission which may be obtained by contacting RETScreen International CANMET Energy Technology Centre Varennes Natural Resources Canada 1615 Lionel Boulet P O Box 4800 Varennes Quebec CANADA J3X 1S6 Te
54. lt 50 M Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambient Temperature CHP 86 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Heat recovery efficiency The user enters the heat recovery efficiency of the heat recovery steam generator HRSG If the gas turbine temperature is too low only part of the heat produced can be recovered Typical values for heat recovery efficiency range from 50 to 80 For a low temperature heating load the higher value can be used and for high temperature heating load the lower value is more suitable If the heat recovery system is for hot water the heat recovery efficiency is typically higher than if it is for steam See the following figure CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the power capacity and heat rate Heating capacity The model calculates the heating capacity of the gas turbine based on the power capacity GT the heat rate and the heat recovery efficiency The heating capacity is the useful thermal output produced by the gas turbine that can be recovered for the steam t
55. meet capacity requirements The costs of the blower systems are a function of many factors and can only be assigned based on the specific requirements for the overall system As a rough estimate the cost for a blower system for a flaring application can range from 37 to 75 per m3 hour of LFG If the LFG will be used as a fuel in an energy project the cost range for the blower system can increase by a factor from 2 to 5 or more depending upon the fuel supply requirements The World Bank 2004 LFG flare The user enters the cost for the landfill gas LFG flare There are 2 basic flare designs the enclosed drum flare and the waste gas flare that simply ignites the methane without any extensive combustion controls This second type of flare is in common use in many jurisdictions but it is not typically deemed acceptable if there is any intent to qualify for Certified Emissions Reductions CERs As a rough estimate a waste gas flare capable of combusting 1 000 m3 hour of LFG would cost in the range of 75 000 to 150 000 depending upon the peripheral controls and safety features required By comparison an enclosed drum flare with a similar capacity will have a cost range of about twice that of the waste gas flare The World Bank 2004 CHP 135 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the a
56. might not stay constant throughout the life of the project due to factors such as changes in regulations in the electricity sectors the planned addition of new generation units on the grid e g large scale hydroelectric project or decommissioning of existing units The model allows for one change in the baseline during the project life that the user enters as a percentage increase or decrease in the initial baseline The baseline emissions will thus be scaled accordingly for the year in which the change occurs as well as each year following the change Change in GHG emission factor The user enters the percentage by which baseline emissions will increase positive percentage or decrease negative percentage because of the change in the baseline For example if a new hydro plant already under construction will decrease emissions by 10 in year 5 then the user enters negative 10 The model will then reduce baseline emissions by 10 for year 5 and all subsequent years CHP 176 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Year of change The user enters the year in which the change in the baseline occurs For example if a new hydro plant is scheduled to be added to the electricity grid during the fifth year after this proposed project begins the user enters 5 GHG emission factor year X and beyond The model calculates the GHG emission factor for the years following the change in baseline Values are calculated by
57. model calculates the annual net heating demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the amount of energy required from the proposed case heating system for space heating including domestic hot water and or for process heating after the implementation of the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures Proposed case district heating network This section is used to prepare a preliminary design and cost estimate for the proposed case district heating network As an example Small commercial heating systems usually use 32 mm to 150 mm 1 to 6 diameter treated plastic or steel in plastic insulated pipes for heat distribution These pipes have proven to be economical to purchase install and maintain but require water temperatures of less than 130 C 95 C for plastic pipes The pipe diameter varies depending on the heating load of the system When pipe length is used in this section it refers to trench length with two pipes The heat losses for a district heating system vary depending on many factors For example an area with snow cover for a long period has fewer losses than an area with similar temperatures and no snow cover In the RETScreen model heat losses have not been included as a separate line item The annual heat losses for a modern district heating system are in the range of 2 to 3 of all energy delivered These numbers change if the pipe length is short and energy delivered is high
58. more than 300 metre The cost is highly influenced by factors such as the nature of the design e g above or below grade the need to remove and relocate any waste the need to add fill or grade areas of the cap and perimeter areas the extent and number of condensate removal traps the cost of petroleum and associated products and the availability and costs for suitable construction contractors The World Bank 2004 LFG condensate drop out system The user enters the cost for the landfill gas LFG condensate drop out system LFG is extremely moist and therefore produces a lot of condensate within the LFG collection wells and piping It is important that all the pipes are designed with minimum slopes so that condensate does not remain within the piping but flows towards a nearby drain or sump Improper drainage of the condensate can lead to blockages in the pipe which can disable large parts of the LFG collection system limiting the amount of LFG that can be collected The World Bank 2004 LFG blower system amp miscellaneous The user enters the cost for the landfill gas LFG blower system and miscellaneous items The blower system includes all components that are used to generate and apply the vacuum to collect the LFG and supply it for its subsequent end use such as valves and controls as required for safe operation e g a flame arrestor condensate pumping or storage LFG flow metering and recording and blowers or compressors to
59. of the purchase price request to the manufacturer The user can refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required The cost allocated to spare parts is best described as a percentage of the total system costs power heating cooling and or balance of system and miscellaneous For large CHP projects operating in normal conditions an inventory of spare parts representing at the most 3 of the total equipment cost should suffice Transportation Transportation costs for equipment and construction materials will vary widely depending upon the mode of transport available and the location of the project site In many instances the cost will depend on distance and be based on a volume weight formula Costs to handle the material at the receiving end should be considered In isolated areas bulk shipments may be received only once a year Logistical control is extremely important here Shipping costs should be obtained from shipping agents when the scope of the project equipment and materials are determined Note that the transportation cost might be included in the equipment cost entered above The user can CHP 138 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required Training amp commissioning The costs associated w
60. on the assumption that there is a constant fraction of biodegradable material in the landfill per unit of time and is an estimate of the generation of methane from this biodegradable material The World Bank 2004 CHP 204 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Landfill Year landfill opened The user enters the year the landfill opened or opens and received or receives waste Final year landfill used The user enters the final year that the landfill is used i e the last year that waste is accepted at the landfill Waste disposal benchmark years The user enters the waste disposal benchmark years based on the years that the most significant changes in the annual waste disposal rate occurred or are expected to occur Six waste disposal benchmark years are entered in this row one each corresponding to an historical or expected annual waste disposal rate The model pastes the year that the landfill opened and the final year that the landfill is used from two cells above The user enters years to help identify the four remaining benchmark years For example if a graph of the annual waste disposal rate were to be plotted versus time in years the user would select those years corresponding to inflection points on the plotted curve If there are no significant changes in the waste profile or fewer points of inflection than is required by the model the user should select years on a regular time interval The u
61. operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel Typical minimum capacity for steam turbines is 40 Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model and capacity The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can also enter the equipment power capacity for reference purposes only CHP 97 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid base
62. or symbol in the additional input cell that appears just below the Second currency switch cell The currency may be expressed using a maximum of three characters US etc To facilitate the presentation of monetary data this selection may also be used to reduce the monetary data by a factor e g reduced by a factor of a thousand hence k 1 000 instead of 1 000 000 If None is selected no unit of currency is shown in the Foreign amount column The user may also select a country to obtain the International Standard Organisation CHP 115 RETScreen Software Online User Manual ISO three letter country currency code For example if Afghanistan is selected from the Second currency switch drop down list the unit of currency shown in the Foreign amount column is AFA The first two letters of the country currency code refer to the name of the country AF for Afghanistan and the third letter to the name of the currency A for Afghani Some currency symbols may be unclear on the screen e g this is caused by the zoom settings of the sheet The user can then increase the zoom to see those symbols correctly Usually symbols will be fully visible on printing even if not fully appearing on the screen display Rate 1st currency 2nd currency The user enters the exchange rate between the currency selected in Currency at the top of the Energy Model worksheet and the currency selected in Second currency
63. sale or exchange of the GHG reduction This value is calculated from the annual net GHG reduction and the GHG reduction credit rate The yearly value of GHG reduction income is escalated at the GHG credit escalation rate Financial viability The results provide the planner decision maker with various financial indicators for the proposed project Pre tax Internal Rate of Return equity The model calculates the pre tax internal rate of return on equity which represents the true interest yield provided by the project equity over its life before income tax It is calculated using the pre tax yearly cash flows and the project life It is also referred to as the return on equity ROE or return on investment ROI or the time adjusted rate of return It is calculated by finding the discount rate that causes the net present value of the equity to be equal to zero Hence it is not necessary to establish the discount rate of an organisation to use this indicator An organisation interested in a project can compare the internal rate of return to its required rate of return often the cost of capital The IRR is calculated on a nominal basis that is including inflation If the internal rate of return is equal to or greater than the required rate of return of the organisation then the project will likely be considered financially acceptable assuming equal risk If it is less than the required rate of return the project is typically rejected An
64. selected at the top right of the Cost Analysis worksheet The exchange rate is used to calculate the values in the Foreign amount column For example the user selects the Afghanistan currency AFA as the currency in which the monetary data of the project is reported i e selection made in Currency input cell on Energy Model worksheet this is the 1st currency The user then selects United States currency USD from the Second currency input cell on the Cost Analysis worksheet this is the 2nd currency The user then enters the exchange rate in the Rate AFA USD input cell i e the amount of AFA needed to purchase 1 USD Using this feature the user can then specify what portion in the Foreign column of a project cost item s costs will be paid for in USD Symbol The user enters the currency manually when selecting User defined as the Second currency The currency may be expressed using a maximum of three characters US etc To facilitate the presentation of monetary data this selection may also be used to reduce the monetary data by a factor e g reduced by a factor of a thousand hence k 1 000 instead of 1 000 000 Foreign The user enters the percentage of an item s costs that will be paid for in the second currency The second currency is selected by the user in the Second currency cell Foreign amount The model calculates for reference purposes only the amount of an item s costs that will
65. system Suggested capacity The model calculates the suggested capacity of the peak load cooling system This value is calculated by subtracting the base load cooling system capacity from the proposed case cooling system peak load calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet Capacity The user enters the capacity of the peak load cooling system If the capacity entered is below the model s suggested capacity of the peak load cooling system then it is assumed that the system cannot meet the peak cooling load at design conditions and the calculations made by the model will not be accurate The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the peak load cooling system capacity over the proposed case cooling system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information CHP 71 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the peak load cooling system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for cooling systems range from 20 for steam jet refrigeration to 700 for
66. that a cooling system sized exactly for the peak cooling load would operate at rated capacity to meet the annual total cooling demand Typical values for the equivalent full load hours range from 1 000 to 4 000 hours for space cooling The upper range increases if the system has a high base load cooling or process cooling load Monthly inputs The user enters the monthly degree days above 10 C 50 F The monthly degree days are the sum of the degree days for each day of the month Degree days for a given day represent the number of Celsius degrees that the mean temperature is above or below a given base Thus cooling degree days are the number of degrees above 10 C The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displayed Base case cooling system The user selects the cooling load type from the drop down list CHP 48 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Technical note on cooling network design The purpose of this technical note is to provide the user with a sample design of a district cooling network used within the RETScreen model The example described below refers to the values presented in the Base case cooling system section example and the Proposed case district cooling network section example In a state of the art district cooling system thermal energy
67. the costs for the proposed case project by clicking on the appropriate radio button Note that this selection is for reference purposes only and does not affect the calculations made in this or other worksheets If the user selects Cost reference the user can choose the cost reference from the drop down list that appears in the next column This feature allows the user to change the information in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns thus allowing the user to create a custom cost reference database If the user selects Second currency two additional input cells appear in the next column Second currency and Rate Ist currency 2nd currency In addition the Quantity range and Unit cost CHP 114 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model range columns change to Foreign and Foreign amount respectively This option allows the user to assign a portion of a project cost item in a second currency to account for those costs that must be paid for in a currency other than the currency in which the project costs are reported Cost reference The user selects the cost reference from the drop down list If the user selects Canada 2005 the range of values reported in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns are for a 2005 baseline year for projects in Canada and in Canadian dollars If the user selects None the information presented in the Quantity range and Unit cost range col
68. the GHG emissions for each fuel type considered Units switch The user can choose to express the fuel consumption in MWh or in GJ GHG emission factor Standard or Custom analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor for each fuel type considered Values are calculated based on the individual emission factors Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent GHG emission factor Simplified analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor for each fuel type considered Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent GHG emission The model calculates the GHG emission for the proposed case system by multiplying the fuel consumption by the GHG emission factor Units are given in equivalent tonnes of CO emissions per year tco2 yr CHP 181 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Landfill gas potential The model calculates the amount of landfill gas flared based on values entered in the Tools worksheet Electricity exported to grid The electricity exported to the grid is calculated in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the GHG Analysis worksheet This value is multiplied by the Transmission and Distribution T amp D losses in and by the GHG emission factor for the base case electricity system to calculate the GHG emissio
69. the end of each year of the term of the debt The model uses the debt interest rate to calculate the debt payments For example at a minimum the debt interest rate will correspond to the yield of government bonds with the same term as the debt term A premium is normally added to this rate the spread to reflect the perceived risk of the project Debt term The user enters the debt term year which is the number of years over which the debt is repaid The debt term is either equal to or shorter than the project life Generally the longer the term the more the financial viability of an energy project improves The model uses the debt term in the calculation of the debt payments and the yearly cash flows The term of the debt normally falls within a 1 to 25 year range It should not exceed the estimated project life Debt payments The model calculates the annual debt payments which is the sum of the principal and interest paid yearly to service the debt Whereas debt payments are constant over the debt term the principal portion increases and the interest portion decreases with time In that respect it is similar to the yearly annuity paid to reimburse the mortgage of a house Debt payments are calculated using the debt interest rate the debt term and the debt The annual debt payments is transferred to the Projects costs and savings income summary section CHP 147 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Income tax analy
70. the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines LHV lt 6MW Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines HHV lt 6MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW Back up power system optional The back up power system is designed to meet the electricity demand in case of failure by the base load intermediate load and or peak load power systems This is an optional equipment and its use will depend on how critical the electrical loads are and whether or not the peak load power system is sufficient to provide all the back up power Type The user enters optional back up power system type considered if required CHP 22 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project M
71. the necessary project financing should be about 1 5 of the total project cost Legal amp accounting Legal and accounting support will be required at different points throughout the development stages of the project This cost item allows the user to account for legal and accounting services not included as part of other development cost items such as for establishing a company to develop the project to prepare monthly and annual financial statements for project accounting etc The requirement for legal support will depend on the arrangements for financing ownership insurance assumption of liability and complexity of contracts and agreements The cost of legal and accounting support is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by experts to provide these services throughout the development of the project Legal and accounting support will involve between 3 and 100 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 500 per person day depending on the complexity and size of the project CHP 124 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Project management The project management cost item should cover the estimated expenses of managing all phases of the development of the project excluding construction supervision Public relations are also included as part of the project management cost item Public relations can be an important element for successful project implementation The elapsed time for the developmen
72. the portion of the LFG that is not flared Energy project LFG fuel consumption start year The user enters the first year that the landfill gas will be used as a fuel for the energy project Project life The user enters the project life in the Financial Summary worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Tools worksheet Units The user selects the type of units energy or volume from the drop down list that the results of this sub section will be displayed in Fuel required average The model calculates the average landfill gas fuel required per hour by the type of energy equipment entered by the user on the Equipment Selection worksheet See the following figure Fuel Required Average LFG fuel potential The model calculates the landfill gas fuel potential per hour up to a maximum amount equal to the Fuel required average as calculated in the cell above The percentage of LFG fuel potential over the average fuel required is also calculated See the following figure LEG Fuel Potential CHP 208 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Remaining fuel required The model calculates the average remaining fuel required per hour by the type of energy equipment entered by the user on the Equipment Selection worksheet This is the amount of fuel required that cannot be met by the landfill site and must come from other sources of fuels e g natural gas The percentage of remaining f
73. the project is located The Flow through situation is typically the most advantageous for the project owner and can contribute to make profitable a project which would not appear financially attractive on a pre tax basis The model does not allow losses to be carried backward and does not set a limit on the number of years for carryforwards Depreciation method The user selects the depreciation method from three options in the drop down list None Declining balance and Straight line This selection of the yearly depreciation of assets is used in the model in the calculation of income taxes and after tax financial indicators The user should select the method accepted by the tax departments in the jurisdiction of the project The difference between the End of project life value and its undepreciated capital costs at the end of the project life is treated as an income if positive and as a loss if negative When None is selected the model assumes that the project is fully capitalised at inception is not depreciated through the years and therefore maintains its undepreciated value throughout its life When Declining balance is selected the model assumes that the capitalised costs of the project as specified by the depreciation tax basis are depreciated at the depreciation rate The portion of initial costs not capitalised is deemed to be expensed during the year of construction i e year 0 When Straight line is selected th
74. the proposed case project might not be justified In this case the project proponent might choose to go directly to the engineering stage combining some steps from the feasibility and development stages Note The RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software can also be used to help prepare the Feasibility Study as well Site investigation A site investigation is normally required for CHP projects especially with ones that include district heating and or cooling The site visit involves a brief survey of all major buildings under consideration In small district energy systems less than 1 000 kW the user would likely look for clusters of oil or electricity heated and or cooled buildings with a distance not exceeding 500 metres Typical major buildings heated and or cooled with oil or electricity include schools hospital health clinics churches senior s apartments service garages and community offices For larger systems customers can be many kilometres away from the central plant The identification of the most promising buildings or clusters is generally followed by a detailed site and building or clusters analysis The analysis includes measurement of the distance between the various buildings determination of the fuel consumption for each building measurement of the building areas and insulation levels study and CHP 117 RETScreen Software Online User Manual documentation of the existing building cooling heatin
75. the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the base case heating system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for heating systems range from 50 for a standard boiler or furnace with pilot light to 350 for a ground source heat pump Typical values of heating system efficiency are presented in the CHP 36 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems table The first 3 listed are based on HHV natural gas fuel Heating load calculation Heating load for building zone cluster The user enters the heating load for the building the building zone or the building cluster If this value is not known e g from fuel bill the user can use the Tools Goal Seek function in Excel to easily calculate this value The user can also refer to the Building Heating Load Chart CET 1997 to estimate the heating load per unit of heated floor area This value depends on the heating design temperature for the specific location and on the building insulation efficiency Typical values for heating loa
76. these studies may be more easily carried out by project proponents Costs will depend on the complexity of the baseline the size of the project CHP 119 RETScreen Software Online User Manual and the availability of sectoral or regional baselines and standardised monitoring methodologies Costs for developing baseline studies and monitoring plans for large projects have ranged from US 30 000 US 40 000 according to analysis by the Prototype Carbon Fund PCF Requirements for Clean Development Mechanism CDM projects are generally more stringent than for Joint Implementation JI or other projects For example CDM projects must also be monitored for their contribution to sustainable development of the host country The rules governing baselines and monitoring for CDM can be found at UNFCCC s CDM Website Note that for small scale CDM projects capacity of 15 MW or energy savings of 15 GWh or less it might not be necessary to carry out a full baseline study as simplified baselines and monitoring methodologies are available Note The optional GHG Analysis worksheet in RETScreen can be used to help prepare the baseline study Report preparation A summary report should be prepared It will describe the feasibility study its findings and recommendations The written report will contain data summaries charts tables and illustrations that clearly describe the proposed project This report should be in sufficient detail regarding
77. to its rated power capacity Typical values for hydro plant capacity factor range from 40 to 95 The user can refer to the RETScreen International Small Hydro Project Model to calculate this value Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated CHP 105 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Photovoltaic module Photovoltaic PV modules produce electricity for the power load using the photons from the sun The model assumes that there is no waste heat recovered for CHP applications Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product D
78. to support cultural or sporting events scholarships training sessions environmental protection etc General amp administrative Annual general amp administrative costs include the costs of bookkeeping preparation of annual statements bank charges communication etc General and administrative costs are project specific and depend on the nature of the business enterprise e g privately CHP 142 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model owned with a simple power purchase agreement or utility publicly owned with individual customers General and administrative costs can range between 1 to 20 of the annual costs excluding custom costs and contingencies O amp M Custom This input cell is provided to allow the user to enter a cost or credit item that is not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word O amp M The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case
79. total load connected to the section and selects the pipe size using the oversizing factor For more information see example in the Technical note on heating network design The selection of pipe size for this model uses a simplified method The pipe sizing criteria used allows a pressure drop for the maximum flow between 1 to 2 millibar meter The maximum velocity in larger pipes is maximised to 3 m s Before construction it is necessary to verify that the selected pipe system will be able to withstand all relevant actions and fulfil the safety and functional requirements during its entire service life The final pipe size needs to be verified using detailed calculations including pipe length and factor in the number of valves connection points elbows etc Total pipe length for main distribution line The model calculates the total pipe length for the main heating distribution network The length refers to trench length with two pipes Secondary heating distribution lines The secondary distribution lines are the parts of the district heating pipe system that connect individual buildings to the main distribution line If the system consists only of one building connected to the plant this pipe is considered a secondary line CHP 42 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Secondary pipe network oversizing The user enters a pipe network oversizing factor The pipes are then automatically sized for a load that is incr
80. up heating system might be utilised in the case of a heating system shutdown or during an interruption in the fuel supply The back up heating system capacity can be calculated as the largest capacity by comparing the sizes of the base load intermediate load intermediate load 2 and the peak load heating systems The use of a back up heating system depends on the design philosophy of the user The back up heating system provides greater security but at a higher cost in new systems For example used oil boiler will often suffice as a back up system In other cases a designer may choose not to include a back up system rather relying only on the peak load heating system This entry does not impact the energy calculations it is only used in the Cost Analysis worksheet Cooling The proposed case cooling system analysed can include three main components as follows 1 Base load cooling system designed to meet the majority of annual base load cooling demand 2 Peak load cooling system typically designed to meet only a small portion of the annual cooling demand that occurs during peak periods and or 3 Back up cooling system optional which is used in case of interruption of the other systems See the following figure Cooling System Load Definition Base load cooling system The user enters the information about the base load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy
81. user from the Fuel type list in the Energy Model Load amp Network Equipment Selection and or GHG Analysis worksheets Fuel type The user enters the name of the fuel for reference purposes only The user also selects Energy units or Heating value units whether the fuel is bought in energy units or not Higher heating value HHV The user enters the higher heating value of the fuel Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Lower heating value LHV The user enters the lower heating value of the fuel Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form CHP 196 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Density The user enters the density for the fuel Fuel consumption unit Heatin
82. user to select one fuel from the fuel type list Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the system CHP 76 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Multiple fuels monthly Selecting Multiple fuels monthly allows the user to select up to 3 different fuel types from the fuel type list The user assigns the 3 fuel types to the twelve months of the year Fuel type The user selects a fuel type from the drop down list for Fuel type 1 Fuel type 2 and or Fuel type 3 Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations The model calculates the fuel consumption on a monthly basis In the monthly fuel type column the user assigns the 3 fuel types to the twelve months of the year by referring to Fuel type 1 Fuel type 2 and or Fuel type 3 Fuel mix The model calculates the fuel mix based on the monthly fuel consumption for each fuel type selected Fuel consumption unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel types selected Fuel consumption The model calculates the annual f
83. will be used before energy is supplied by the intermediate and or peak load systems See one of the following figures Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load Base load heating system Intermediate load heating system Type The user selects the power system type considered from the drop down list Biomass system Boiler Capacity The user enters the capacity of the heating system The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the heating system capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the heating system The percentage of the heating delivered by the heating system over the proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information CHP 73 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the heat
84. worksheet Data are provided for Canadian costs with 2005 as a baseline year The user also has the ability to create a custom cost database The user selects the reference from the Cost Analysis worksheet that will be used as a guideline for the estimation of costs associated with the implementation of the project This feature allows the user to change the Quantity range and the Unit cost range columns The options from the drop down list are Canada 2005 None and a selection of 5 user defined options Custom 1 Custom 2 etc If the user selects Canada 2005 the range of values reported in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns are for a 2005 baseline year for projects in Canada and in Canadian dollars Selecting None hides the information presented in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns The user may choose this option for example to minimise the amount of information printed in the final report If Custom 1 or any of the other 5 selections is selected the user may manually enter quantity and cost information that is specific to the region in which the project is located and or for a different cost base year This selection thus allows the user to customise the information in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns The user can also overwrite Custom 1 to enter a specific name e g Japan 2005 for a new set of unit cost and quantity ranges The user may also evaluate a si
85. 0 218 GHG emission factor 166 167 171 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 GHG emission factor excl T amp D 175 176 GHG emission factor year X and beyond 177 GHG emission reduction summary 165 182 GHG equivalence 0 eeeeeesecsseeecneeeeeneeeeeees 218 GHG monitoring amp verification 140 142 GHG reduction COSt eee eeeeecseesecteeeeeeeeeeeees 163 GHG reduction credit duration 155 156 GHG reduction credit escalation rate 155 156 GHG reduction credit rate 155 156 160 163 190 GHG reduction income 154 155 160 166 GHG reduction income duration 6 160 GHG validation amp registration 122 123 Global warming potential of GHG 171 Greenhouse Gas GHG Emission Reduction ANALYSIS n he ESE 165 Grid ty peisiuce eee ose lao ee 60 Gross annual GHG emission reduction 183 Ground monitoring stations data 0 222 H Heat for cooling ininum e 66 Heat PUMP cieeviesacnciackesentesaaiee es 68 75 Heat rate 22 61 81 84 86 102 108 213 214 Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude 6 82 84 86 251 Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambient Temperature eee 6 82 84 86 252 Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity RELE AEAEE E EEE Beds 6 82 84 86 252 Heat rec veredanere tainn 110 Heat recovery efficiency 82 84 87 103 109 214 Heated floo
86. 00 to 1 500 for horizontal loop or 400 to 4 000 for vertical loop Major installation Major equipment Major installation Major equipment Major installation Heat pump air source Heat pump ground source Fuel connections storage Flue Vent Fuel connections storage Flue Vent Fuel connections storage Flue Vent Ductwork curbs amp Fuel connections storage Flue Vent Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads pads Note Typical installed cost values in Canadian as of January 1 2005 Approximate exchange rate at time was 1 CAD 0 81 USD and 1 CAD 0 62 EUR Typical Installed Cost Range Cooling Eq Typical installed cost S KW ooling RETScreen cooling equipment type Included in cost Major equipment Major installation Air cooled condenser heat exchanger Major equipment Major installation Cooling tower Major equipment Major installation Compressor air cooled 200 to 500 110 to 300 25 to 60 for cooling tower Compressor water cooled Heat pump air source 375 to 650 uipment Not included in cost Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Fuel connections storage Ductwork curbs amp pads Major equipment Major installation 450 to 600 200 to 1 500 for horizontal well
87. 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 116 128 131 132 143 145 153 180 196 204 211 212 220 260 Model and capacity eee eeeeceseereeeeeneeeee 97 99 Model flow chart 0 ccccceecceeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeneeeees 8 Moisture content wet basis csceeeeeee 212 Monthly inputs 34 48 Multiple fuels monthly ce eeeeeeeereeeees 77 Multiple fuels percentage eee 77 78 N N20 emission factor 174 178 180 197 200 204 211 NASA global satellite data 0 eee 222 Nearest location for weather data 33 47 Net annual GHG emission reduction 184 218 Net cooling demand eeeeeeecsecneeeeeeeeee 53 Net electricity demand eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Net GHG reduction credit duration 156 190 Net GHG reduction project life 155 Net GHG reduction yr 1 to x 1st period 154 Net GHG reduction yr x 1 and beyond 2nd period esna a 154 Net heating demand eee eseeeeeneeeeeeeees 40 Net peak cooling load n se 53 Net peak electricity load eeeeeeeee eters 65 Net peak heating load 0 eee eeeeeecteeeeeeeees 39 Net Present Value NPV 162 186 193 Nir ten rannen 199 202 Non weather dependent cooling 48 Number of buildings in building cluster 36 50 CHP 274 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model O O amp M 62 123 124 139 140 142 143 158 185 187 O amp M CustOm es ea 143 Operatin
88. 151 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Cooling premium income rebate The model calculates the cooling premium income or rebate This value is calculated by multiplying the base case cooling system fuel cost by the cooling premium or rebate The annual value of the cooling premium income rebate is escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate Customer premium income rebate The model calculates the total annual customer premium income or rebate This value is transferred to the Project costs and savings income summary section Electricity export income If there is electricity exported to the grid by the proposed case power system certain input fields will be added to allow the user to customise the electricity export income analysis according to the specific circumstances of the project Note that if there is no electricity exported to the grid then the user can not use this option Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid This value is calculated in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet Electricity export rate The user enters the electricity export rate for the proposed case power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet This value is assumed to be representative of year 0 i e the development year prior to the first year of operation yea
89. 2 75 8 76 8 77 3 1250 psig 86 2bar 754 76 5 77 0 Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat Correction factor Initial superheat C CHP 250 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure Correction factor Back pressure kPa Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude Correction factor Altitude m CHP 251 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity Correction tactor 0 005 0 010 0 015 0 020 025 0 030 Specific humidity kg water vapour kg dry air Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambient Temperature Correction factor Ambient temperature C CHP 252 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Full Power Capacity Output 1 500 1 250 1 000 750 Remaining electricity required Load kW 500 Electricity 250 Electritity deliveted to Ipad Jan Feb Mar Apr May Remaining cecina require jun Jul Oct Nov Dec Month Aug Sep ste Heating Power lt Cooling Power Load Following 1 500 1 250 1 000 750 Remaining electricity required Load kW 500 250 Electricity deliveted to Ipad Q Jan Feb Mar Apr May ate Heating Remaining pl require Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
90. 246 Design return temperature cece eee 41 54 Design supply temperature eee eee 40 54 Detailed cost estimate cee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 119 Development 114 120 121 123 128 139 142 155 157 165 167 168 269 Differential temperature 0 ee eee 41 55 Disclaimer amp indemnification 00 0 0 eee 266 DisCOUNt rate poen r E ERE 146 Distribution equipment sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 137 Distribution graph cee eceseeeessecseeeeeeeneeees 194 District cooling network COSt cesses 57 District heating network COSt 0 eee eeeeeeeees 43 Domestic hot water heating base demand 34 Duct ANS ernis errei ss eR A 87 Duct firing heating capacity 87 E Effective income tax rate eee eeeeeeeee 148 Efficiency 6 22 61 111 213 214 250 251 254 255 269 Efficiency Calculation 6 22 61 111 213 254 255 Electrical design eceeeeesseeeeesecseeeeeneeeeeees 126 Electricity COSt cs eseecseseseeceeeeeceseeeeeeeneeees 215 Electricity delivered to load 19 20 21 80 83 92 98 101 102 104 105 107 108 110 Electricity demand 64 215 216 217 Electricity demand time of use 06 215 Electricity demand correction factor 217 Electricity demand difference 06 217 Electricity export escalation rate 153 Electricity export INCOME 152 160 Electricity export rate s s s 110 152 189 Electricity exp
91. 38 39 50 52 53 61 69 71 75 76 77 78 79 82 85 87 98 101 103 109 110 129 136 143 145 158 159 173 175 177 178 179 180 181 188 196 197 198 200 201 203 204 208 209 211 212 213 237 249 258 262 263 264 268 EK E E E E hue ore 101 Fuel Cell Characteristics 5 101 103 237 Fuel Cell Installed Cost Examples 6 129 258 Fuel Cell Schematic 00 ccceee 6 101 249 Fuel consumption 38 39 52 77 78 179 181 197 200 203 211 212 Fuel consumption annual eee 39 52 Fuel consumption as fired e eee 212 Fuel consumption unit 38 52 77 78 197 200 203 211 Fuel cost 39 53 77 79 145 158 159 188 211 Fuel cost base case cccseccceceesesseeees 159 188 Fuel cost proposed case eee 158 188 Fuel cost escalation rate cccceesceeseesseeeee 145 Fuel handling system 00 cc eeeseeseeeeeseeeeeees 136 Fuel MiX cceeeeseceseeeeees 77 78 173 178 180 Fuel rate20 25 27 39 52 53 61 69 71 76 77 78 109 110 197 200 203 211 212 Fuel rate as fired 212 Fuel rate base case heating system 109 Fuel rate proposed case power system 110 Fuel rate unit 39 52 77 78 197 200 203 Fuel required 75 76 82 85 87 98 103 109 208 209 213 Fuel required annual ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 209 Fuel Required Annual 00 7 209 263 Fuel req
92. 70 71 SUIPHUP siirsi pesenrt 199 268 Summary 14 32 38 39 46 52 53 59 91 97 145 152 154 156 163 164 165 166 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 193 208 Summary of main distribution line pipe cost 46 59 Summary of main distribution line pipe length System design graph 21 26 27 31 69 71 73 75 80 83 85 101 103 105 106 107 System energy demand eee 32 67 System peak electricity load over max monthly AVETALC Hoos AE ASSE 64 215 217 System peak load oo eee eeeeeeeseeeseeeees 31 66 System selection ceesseeeeeeeseereeeeeneeees 72 79 T T amp D losses 4 172 173 174 175 176 182 Tax holiday available ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 150 Tax holiday duration 150 Technical note on cooling network design 49 50 55 56 Technical note on heating network design 35 36 42 43 Temperature 41 89 90 95 99 201 252 Tenders amp contracting ee eeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 127 Terms Of USec iina nipte 266 Theoretical steam rate TSR 90 91 95 96 Threshold rard arnt EEE EESE 185 186 Tools 14 17 37 50 134 173 179 182 196 208 211 Total 38 42 43 46 47 52 56 57 59 60 62 64 92 199 202 205 216 Total building cluster connection cost 46 59 Total cooling demand 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 Total district cooling network cost ee 60 Total district heating network cost 0 47 Tot
93. B has been established to oversee and monitor the CDM The Executive Board is responsible for accrediting Designated Operational Entities DOE that validate CDM projects and verify and certify emissions reductions Credits generated and certified from CDM projects are known as Certified Emissions Reductions or CERs A CER is equal to one metric tonne of carbon dioxide CO equivalent and must be certified by a Designated Operational Entity In November 2001 at COP 7 in Marrakech Morocco the parties reached an agreement on the legal text needed to implement the Kyoto Protocol A key outcome of Marrakech was agreement on the basic rules and regulations governing the CDM These rules are covered in a section of the Marrakech Accord known as Modalities and Procedures for a Clean Development Mechanism Specific issues agreed to in Marrakech include the baseline approaches that will be permitted for CDM projects the procedures for approving baseline methodologies and the format of the Project Design Document PDD Marrakech also allowed for simplified procedures for small scale projects and identified the types of projects that could be considered small scale All CDM projects must be additional to any that would occur in the absence of the proposed project activity in order to be eligible for credits This qualification is called additionality All CDM projects therefore require the estimation or measurement of baseline emissions th
94. C ratio which is the ratio of the net benefits to costs of the project Net benefits represent the present value of annual income and savings less annual costs while the cost is defined as the project equity CHP 162 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Ratios greater than 1 are indicative of profitable projects The net benefit cost ratio similar to the profitability index leads to the same conclusion as the net present value indicator Debt service coverage The model calculates the debt service coverage for each year of the project and reports the lowest ratio encountered throughout the term of debt The debt service coverage is the ratio of the operating benefits of the project over the debt payments This value reflects the capacity of the project to generate the cash liquidity required to meet the debt payments It is calculated by dividing net operation income and savings net cash flows before depreciation debt payments and income taxes by debt payments principal and interest The debt service coverage is a ratio used extensively by the potential lenders for a project to judge financial risk The model assumes that the cumulative cash flows are used to finance a sufficient debt service reserve before any distributions to the shareholders GHG reduction cost The model calculates the GHG reduction cost The GHG reduction cost is calculated by dividing the annual life cycle savings of the project by the
95. Equipment Selection and Energy Model worksheets and they are copied automatically to the GHG Analysis worksheet If the same fuel is used for different types of equipment the model will display this fuel type only once in the GHG Analysis worksheet and the total fuel consumption will be calculated by the model Electricity fuel refers to energy supplied by the electricity grid for the proposed case system Fuel mix The fuel mix of the proposed case system is calculated automatically from the consumption of different fuel types as defined in the Equipment Selection and Energy Model worksheets CQO2 CH and N2O emission factors Custom analysis The user enters the CO CH and NO emission factors corresponding to the fuel types If one of the fuel types is electricity the emission factor for the base case electricity system is used CO CH and N O emission factors represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of equipment For each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of energy generated kg GJ For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N2O emission factors for a number of fuel
96. G reduction to calculate the annual GHG reduction income Preliminary estimates predict the market price of GHG reduction credit rates will range from US 4 to US 95 per tonne of CO with 5 to 8 per tonne being the most likely range Sandor 1999 As of 2003 the global market price has typically been in the range of US 3 to US 5 per tonne of CO The value entered is assumed to be representative of year 0 i e the development year prior to the first year of operation year 1 The model escalates the GHG reduction credit rate yearly according to the GHG reduction credit escalation rate starting from year and throughout the GHG reduction credit duration GHG reduction income The model calculates the annual GHG reduction income which represents the income generated by the sale or exchange of the GHG reductions It is calculated from the annual net GHG reduction and the GHG reduction credit rate The annual value of GHG reduction income is escalated at the GHG reduction credit escalation rate The annual GHG reduction income is transferred to the Project costs and savings income summary section GHG reduction credit duration The user enters the GHG reduction credit duration year This value typically represents the number of years for which the project receives GHG reduction credits It is used to determine the GHG reduction income over the project life For Clean Development Mechanism CDM projects two options are currently av
97. LFG generation Theoretical The model calculates the theoretical volume of landfill gas that can be generated per tonne of waste by dividing the Methane generation from waste Lo value by the Methane by volume of LFG value LFG collection efficiency The user enters the landfill gas collection system efficiency Typical values range from 60 to 80 of gas recovered with 75 normally assumed in the absence of site specific data LFG generation Potential The model calculates the potential volume of landfill gas that can be generated per tonne of waste in the landfill site collected by the landfill gas collection system and potentially used by the energy project This is calculated by multiplying the LFG generation Theoretical times LFG collection efficiency Heating value of LFG The user enters the heating value of the landfill gas The heating value of the landfill gas is based on the concentration of methane in the landfill gas since methane is the primary component of landfill gas that contributes to the gas s heating value Typical landfill gas consists of 50 methane and 50 carbon dioxide and has a heating value of about 18 5 MJ m CHP 207 RETScreen Software Online User Manual LFG CH4 emission factor The model calculates the methane CH4 emission factor for the landfill gas generated at the landfill site This value is used to calculate the base case greenhouse gas GHG emissions resulting from
98. Month E Power amp Cooling CHP 253 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heating Load Following 1 000 750 i Remaining electricity required Load kW 500 250 Jan Feb Electricity Electricity delivered to Ipad Mar Apr May Remaining electricit require Jun Jul Month Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Efficiency Calculation Power plant 100 kWh Heating plant 100 kWh ii Fuel gt 100 kWh CHP plant Note t Heating lt Power Heating load Heating load Cooling Efficiency 30 55 42 5 100 100 100 100 3 600 30 55 8 470 kJ kWh Efficiency 30 55 100 85 0 100 3 600 30 55 4 235 kJ kWh To calculate the efficiency in heat rate units kJ kWh the fuel consumption in kWh is multiplied by 3 600 kJ kWh and to calculate the efficiency in heat rate units Btu kWh the fuel consumption in kWh is multiplied by 3 412 Btu kWh CHP 254 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Heat rate 100 3 600 30 12 000 kJ kWh CHP plant 100 kWh Heat recovery efficiency SGU 55 _ 78 6 load 100 30 Note To calculate the efficiency in heat rate units kJ kWh the fuel consumption in kWh is multiplied by 3 600 kJ kWh and to calculate the efficiency in heat rate units Btu
99. P 198 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Nitrogen The user enters the amount of nitrogen N2 present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass nitrogen content typically ranges from 0 to 4 Green parts of the tree typically have higher nitrogen content Sulphur The user enters the amount of sulphur present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass sulphur content typically ranges from 0 to 1 Ash The user enters the amount of ash present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass ash content typically ranges from 1 to 10 Some biomass derived fuels such as paper mill sludge can have ash contents greater than 25 Total The model calculates the total percentage of dry fuel weight of the fuel evaluated The user should verify that this value equals 100 Higher heating value HHV The model calculates the higher heating value of the fuel using Delong s formula for fossil fuel and a modified Delong formula for biomass fuel Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is
100. RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Fuel Cell Characteristics Heat recovery efficiency The user enters the heat recovery efficiency of the heat recovery system If the power equipment temperature is too low only part of the heat produced can be recovered Typical values for fuel cell heat recovery efficiency range from 0 to 30 See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Fuel Cell Characteristics Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the power capacity and heat rate Heating capacity The model calculates the heating capacity of the power equipment based on the power capacity the heat rate and the heat recovery efficiency The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Wind turbine Wind turbines produce electricity for the power load using the kinetic energy from the wind The model assumes that there is no waste heat recovered fo
101. RETScreen International Clean Energy Decision Support Centre RETScreen Software Online User Manual Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Natural Resources Ressources naturelles Canada Canada Canada Background This document allows for a printed version of the RETScreen Software Online User Manual which is an integral part of the RETScreen Software The online user manual is a Help file within the software The user automatically downloads the online user manual Help file while downloading the RETScreen Software Reproduction This document may be reproduced in whole or in part in any form for educational or nonprofit uses without special permission provided acknowledgment of the source is made Natural Resources Canada would appreciate receiving a copy of any publication that uses this report as a source However some of the materials and elements found in this report are subject to copyrights held by other organizations In such cases some restrictions on the reproduction of materials or graphical elements may apply it may be necessary to seek permission from the author or copyright holder prior to reproduction To obtain information concerning copyright ownership and restrictions on reproduction please contact RETScreen International Disclaimer This report is distributed for informational purposes and does not necessarily reflect the views of the Government of Canada nor constitute an endorsement of any commercia
102. The selection of pipe size for this model uses a simplified method The pipe sizing criteria used allows a pressure drop for the maximum flow between 1 to 2 millibar meter The maximum velocity in larger pipes is maximised to 3 m s Before construction it is necessary to verify that the selected pipe system will be able to withstand all relevant actions and fulfil the safety and functional requirements during its entire service life The final pipe size needs to be verified using detailed calculations including pipe length and factor in the number of valves connection points elbows etc District heating network cost Total pipe length The model calculates the total pipe length as the sum of the total pipe length for the main heating distribution line and the total length of pipe section for the secondary heating distribution lines CHP 43 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Costing method The user selects the type of costing method from the drop down list If the Formula costing method is selected the model calculates the costs according to built in formulas If the Detailed costing method is selected the user enters the Energy Transfer Station ETS and secondary distribution pipes costs per building cluster and the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories The costs calculated by the Formula costing method are based on typical Canadian project costs as of January 2005 The user can adjust these costs
103. a specific location from the online weather database dialogue box Data sets from NASA are obtained via the Visit NASA Satellite Data Site button in the dialogue box Ground monitoring stations data From the dialogue box the user selects the Country then the Sub region provinces in Canada states in the United States of America and n a in the rest of the countries and finally a weather station location The weather station usually corresponds to the name of a city town within the selected country In the Weather Database Map the white dots represent weather stations From the dialogue box the data can be pasted to the spreadsheets by clicking on the Paste Data button Only data that are in bold are pasted to the spreadsheets all other data are for reference purposes only Data entered using the online weather database may be overwritten i e the user may prefer to use other data and can manually enter values into the spreadsheets As an alternative the user can use the NASA satellite data particularly for the case when the project location is not close to the given weather station location NASA global satellite data A link to the NASA Surface meteorology and Solar Energy Data Set Website is provided in the online weather database dialogue box The user is able to select the data required for the model by clicking on a region on the world map illustrated on the NASA Website The location is narrowed down to a cell within a specif
104. ag time before LFG generation 04 206 Land Tease enken rn 138 140 Landfill 134 179 182 204 205 206 209 269 Landfill gas 134 179 182 204 206 209 Landfill gas LFG 0 cecceseeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 206 Landfill gas generation rate graph 209 Landfill gas potential eee 179 182 Language Langue eee eeeeeeeeees 12 15 Language Options cesceeceeesceseeeeeeeseeeneenee 12 Legal amp accounting 0 0 eee eeeesecneeeeeeeeeeeeee 124 Length of pipe section eee eeeeeenees 43 56 Level Of risk onreine iie 193 LFG CH4 emission factor n se 208 LFG blower system amp miscellaneous 135 LFG collection efficiency sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 207 LFG collection field oo cee eeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 LFG collection piping ceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeees 134 LFG collection system 133 134 135 204 LFG condensate drop out system 0 135 LEG flares ieoa 135 210 LFG flared base case 210 LFG flared proposed case s s 210 LFG fuel consumption start year 208 LFG fuel potential eee eeeeeneeeee 208 209 LFG Fuel Potential 7 208 209 262 264 LFG fuel potential annual 0 0 0 eee 209 LFG Fuel Potential Annual 7 209 264 LFG generation potential cece 207 LFG generation theoretical eee 207 LFG system base case n 210 License agreement ee eeeseeseeeecneeeeen
105. age load during the various rate periods Electricity demand time of use The model calculates the estimated electricity demand in for the various rate periods by multiplying the average load for the period by the number of hours for the week Electricity cost The model calculates the estimated electricity cost for the various rate periods on a weekly basis by multiplying the electricity demand by the energy charge The capacity charge is calculated separately and included in the annual total electricity cost Fixed charge monthly The user enters the monthly fixed charge System peak electricity load over max monthly average The user enters the system peak electricity load over maximum monthly average load which represents the percentage that the peak electricity load exceeds the maximum monthly average load over the twelve month period CHP 215 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Total electricity cost The model calculates the total annual electricity cost Electricity demand The model calculates annual electricity demand Electricity rate The model calculates average electricity rate for the year This electricity rate can be used for the base case and or proposed case system depending on the project circumstances Electricity rate monthly This tool is used to determine the average electricity rate for the base case power system based on information from a monthly electricity bill The user e
106. ailable for the length of the crediting period i a fixed crediting period of 10 years or ii a renewable crediting period of 7 years that can be renewed twice for a maximum credit duration of 21 years If a crediting period of 10 years is selected once the project has been validated and registered Certified Emission Reductions CERs can be certified and issued for the 10 years of the project without revisiting the baseline However in the case CHP 155 RETScreen Software Online User Manual of a renewable 7 year crediting period the project will have to be validated after each 7 year period in order to receive CERs for the subsequent 7 years Thus in selecting a crediting period the benefits of the potentially longer crediting period of the renewable crediting period e g up to 21 years must be weighed against the additional transaction costs of re validating the project after each 7 year period and the risk of the project potentially not meeting validation requirements at that time Net GHG reduction credit duration The model calculates the cumulative net GHG reduction in equivalent tonnes of CO tco2 resulting from the implementation of the proposed case system instead of the base case or baseline system for the GHG credit duration This value is calculated by multiplying the appropriate annual net GHG reduction by the GHG reduction credit duration GHG reduction credit escalation rate The user enters the GHG
107. ailed cost estimate will range between 300 and 1 000 per person day The number of person days required to complete the cost estimate will range between 3 and 100 depending on the size of the project and acceptable level of risk GHG baseline study amp monitoring plan In order for the greenhouse gas GHG emissions reductions generated from a project to be recognized and sold on domestic or international carbon markets several project documents need to be developed the key elements of which are a GHG baseline study and a Monitoring Plan MP A GHG baseline study identifies and justifies a credible project baseline based on the review of relevant information such as grid expansion plans dispatch models fuel use on the margin current fuel consumption patterns and emissions factors The GHG baseline study sets a project boundary and identifies all sources of GHG emissions that would have occurred under the baseline scenario i e the scenario most likely to have occurred if the project were not implemented A Monitoring Plan identifies the data that needs to be collected in order to monitor and verify the emissions reductions resulting from the project and describes a methodology for quantifying these reductions as measured against the project baseline An outside consultant or team is often called in to develop the baseline study and monitoring plan However as more project examples become available and standardised methodologies are accepted
108. al resources organisational capacity financial resources or capacity to absorb new technologies emissions would have been higher As an example of how RETScreen can be used with Appendix B of the document Simplified modalities and procedures for small scale CDM project activities under paragraph 28 of this document concerning a system where all fossil fuel fired generating units use fuel oil or diesel fuel the baseline is the annual kWh generated by the renewable unit times an emission coefficient for a modern diesel generating unit of the relevant capacity operating at optimal load as given in the Emission Factors for Diesel Generator Systems table In this example the user would select Simplified analysis at the top of the RETScreen Portions of this text were adapted from Appendix B of the document Simplified modalities and procedures for small scale CDM project activities available at the UNFCCC s CDM Website CHP 170 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model GHG Analysis Worksheet and enter other as the fuel type under the Base case electricity system Baseline section and then enter the appropriate GHG emission factor as selected from the table Note that the UNFCCC used RETScreen to help calculate the emission factors at different load levels for the table Global warming potential of GHG The model indicates the global warming potential of methane CH and nitrous oxide N20 If the
109. al electricity cost e cece 62 64 216 Total heating demand ee eeeeeeeeseereeeeees 38 Total peak cooling load osese 52 CHP 276 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Total peak heating load o on 38 Total pipe length eee 42 43 56 57 Total pipe length for main distribution line 42 56 Total power capacity GTCC with extraction Eevavvetbedeedsands aan e E N r a e Ra 92 Total power capacity GTCC without extraction a n e E ET 92 Total waste in landfill x years eee 205 Training amp COMmMIssSioning eseese 139 Training amp support s sseseseeieseeesesrsrerrereersrsere 265 Transmission line csccesceeseeeeeeseeeeeeneeene 129 Transportation s ic nine re isee 138 Travel amp accommodation 118 121 125 139 Type 18 19 20 22 24 25 27 28 30 31 60 68 70 73 79 107 220 Typical Costs for Cooling Distribution Line PIPOS 325 s stee Hee an tes ess 5 59 244 Pipes 2 dine aei eR ne ch eee aad 5 46 244 Typical Costs for Indirect Cooling Energy Transfer Station s cccceeseeseeeee 5 58 243 Typical Costs for Indirect Heating Energy Transfer Station s ccccceeeeeseeeee 5 45 243 Typical District Cooling Supply and Return Temperatures cc ceeeeesseceeeeeneeeeee 5 54 242 Typical District Heating Supply and Return Temperatures eeeeeeseceereeeneeeee 5 41 242 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines
110. al electricity cost The model calculates the total electricity cost based on the electricity demand and the electricity rate for the base case power system Base case system load characteristics graph The base case system load characteristics graph shows the base case average load profile for the power cooling and or heating systems on a monthly basis Proposed case energy efficiency measures End use energy efficiency measures The user enters the percent of the base case power system s annual peak load i e power net average load that is reduced as a result of implementing the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures This value is used to calculate the power net average load in the Proposed case load characteristics section the net peak electricity load and the net electricity demand for the proposed case system Typical values range from 0 to 25 depending on the measures implemented Note These proposed case end use energy efficiency measures are in addition to the improvements in energy efficiency that result from implementing the proposed case system as calculated in the other worksheets For example as part of implementing a new cooling heating and or power system the user might also CHP 64 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model want to implement other measures such as improved lighting fixtures that reduce the load that the new proposed case system will have to meet Net peak electricit
111. allows the user to compare the net annual GHG emission reduction with units that are easier to conceptualise e g Cars amp light trucks not used using the drop down list These numbers are based on North American energy use patterns Note At this point the user should complete the Financial Summary worksheet CHP 184 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Sensitivity and Risk Analysis As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software a Sensitivity and Risk Analysis worksheet is provided to help the user estimate the sensitivity of important financial indicators in relation to key technical and financial parameters This standard sensitivity and risk analysis worksheet contains a settings section and two main sections Sensitivity analysis and Risk analysis Each section provides information on the relationship between the key parameters and the important financial indicators showing the parameters which have the greatest impact on the financial indicators The Sensitivity analysis section is intended for general use while the Risk analysis section which performs a Monte Carlo simulation is intended for users with knowledge of statistics Both types of analysis are optional Inputs entered in this worksheet will not affect results in other worksheets Settings Sensitivity analysis The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not the optional sensitivity analysis section is used to conduct
112. an estimate from local building contractors as this item can represent a significant amount of the total project costs Other uses for the building e g workshop lumber drying kiln etc should also be considered Existing buildings should be used if possible to help avoid this cost The length of approach roads and the area of the yard vary depending on the particular site the volume of fuel that is to be stored in the yard and the delivery vehicles that are to be used The roads and yards must permit vehicles to manoeuvre and back up without difficulty Making them too small could cause a lot of problems The cost of approach roads and yard construction vary significantly depending on the required road and yard area the soil material and the proximity of gravel pits In some cases additional land might need to be purchased for the yard and building construction If this is the case add the land costs to the yard construction costs If land is to be leased include the lease cost under Land lease in the Annual costs section Spare parts Spare parts necessary for the proposed case project should be included in the project costs The after purchase price will most often be significantly higher The extent of the inventory required will depend on the reliability of the system warranty complexity of equipment at the site transportation difficulty and availability of off the shelf components The cost of spare parts should normally be part
113. anual Typically a steam turbine requires a minimum mixture quality in the range of 0 90 to 0 95 If the mixture quality is too low there could be erosion of the steam turbine blades due to the collision of the water droplets and the turbine blades thus increasing the cost of maintenance of the power system Increasing the extraction pressure increases the mixture quality If the extraction pressure cannot be increased more than one steam turbine has to be used in conjunction with a reheater or a moisture separator This will help reduce ongoing maintenance costs but will increase the initial cost of equipment Enthalpy The model calculates the enthalpy of the steam at the output of the extraction port Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat content of a substance Theoretical steam rate TSR The model calculates the theoretical steam rate TSR of the extracted steam which represents the theoretical amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Back pressure The user enters the steam turbine back pressure or exhaust pressure The higher the back pressure is the higher the heating capacity is at the back pressure port and the lower the power capacity is and vice versa Temperature The model calculates the temperature of the steam at the back pressure port which is the saturation temperature at the back pressure Mixture quality The model calculates steam moisture mixture quality at the output of the back pressu
114. ar year 0 for income tax purposes The incentives and grants is transferred to the Projects costs and savings income summary section Debt ratio The user enters the debt ratio which is the ratio of debt over the sum of the debt and the equity of a project The debt ratio reflects the financial leverage created for a project the higher the debt ratio the larger the financial leverage The model uses the debt ratio to calculate the equity investment that is required to finance the project For example CHP 146 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model debt ratios typically range anywhere from 0 to 90 with 50 to 90 being the most common Debt The model calculates the project debt which is the portion of the total investment required to implement the project and that is financed by a loan The project debt leads to the calculation of the debt payments and the net present value It is calculated using the total initial costs and the equity Equity The model calculates the project equity which is the portion of the total investment required to finance the project that is funded directly by the project owner s The project equity is deemed to be disbursed at the end of year 0 i e the development construction year It is calculated using the total initial costs and the debt ratio Debt interest rate The user enters the debt interest rate which is the annual rate of interest paid to the debt holder at
115. at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy elected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet CHP 104 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Hydro turbine Hydro turbines produce electricity for the power load using the potential and kinetic energy from the falling flowing water The model assumes that there is no waste heat recovered for CHP applications Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Capacity factor The user enters the capacity factor which represents the ratio of the average power produced by the hydro plant over a year
116. atabase for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Capacity factor The user enters the capacity factor which represents the ratio of the average power produced by the photovoltaic system over a year to its rated power capacity Typical values for photovoltaic system capacity factor range from 15 to 20 The user can refer to the RETScreen International Photovoltaic Project Model version 3 0 or higher to calculate this value CHP 106 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Other In this section the user enters information about other types of power systems not listed in the Type drop down list The Other option can be used to evaluate new power generation technologies Description The user enters the description of the power system for refer
117. ater and or for process heating This value is copied automatically in the Financial Summary worksheet Total peak heating load The model calculates the annual total peak heating load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the instantaneous heat required from the base case heating system to meet the largest space heating load including domestic hot water and or process heating load It typically coincides with the coldest day of the year for space heating applications This value is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet Fuel consumption unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel type selected for each building zone or building cluster CHP 38 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel consumption annual The model calculates the annual fuel consumption for the building the building zone or the building cluster Fuel rate unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel type selected for each building zone or building cluster Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the base case heating system Fuel cost The model calculates the fuel cost for the base case heating system This value is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet Proposed case energy efficiency measures End use energy efficiency measures The user enters the percent of the base case heating syst
118. ating strategies CHP 110 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Remaining heat required The model calculates the remaining heat required for the different operating strategies This value represents the heat that has to be provided by the intermediate load 2 and or the peak load heating systems as defined in the Energy Model worksheet Power system fuel The model calculates the power system fuel consumed for the different operating strategies Operating profit loss The model calculates the operating profit loss for the different operating strategies This value represents the operating profit or loss to operate the selected power system based on the operating strategy selected This calculation does not include costs related to initial costs operation and maintenance financing etc Efficiency The model calculates the efficiency for the different operating strategies which represents the ratio of useful energy electricity delivered to load electricity exported to grid and heat recovered to the energy input power system fuel The user can also select the efficiency in kJ kWh units from the drop down list In this case the efficiency is expressed as the amount of energy input in kJ from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of useful energy See the following figure Efficiency Calculation Select base load power system When there is a base and an intermediate load power system the us
119. ator likely falls It is the percentile of the distribution of the financial indicator corresponding to half the level of risk defined by the user For example for a Minimum within level of confidence value of 15 IRR equity a level of risk of 10 means that 5 half the level of risk of the possible IRR equity values are lower than 15 Maximum within level of confidence The model calculates the Maximum within level of confidence which is the upper limit of the confidence interval within which the financial indicator likely falls It is the percentile of the distribution of the financial indicator corresponding to 100 minus half the level of risk For example for a Maximum within level of confidence value of 27 5 IRR equity a level of risk of 10 means that 95 of the possible IRR equity values are lower than 27 5 Distribution graph This histogram provides a distribution of the possible values for the financial indicator resulting from the Monte Carlo simulation The height of each bar represents the frequency of values that fall in the range defined by the width of each bar The value corresponding to the middle of each range is plotted on the X axis Looking at the distribution of financial indicator the user is able to rapidly assess its variability In some cases there is insufficient data to properly plot the graph For example when the equity payback is immediate the result is the n a symbol and ther
120. aturated temperature See one of the following figures Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat Actual steam rate ASR The model calculates the actual steam rate ASR for the steam turbine based on the steam flow maximum extraction turbine efficiency and the theoretical steam rates at the extraction port and back pressure port This value is the actual amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power CHP 96 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Summary This section summarises the power and heating capacities with and without extraction It also provides the electricity delivered to the load and exported to the grid depending on the operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Power capacity with extraction The model calculates the power capacity of the steam turbine with extraction The percentage of the power capacity with extraction over the proposed case power system peak load is also calculated Power capacity without extraction The model calculates the power capacity of the steam turbine without extraction The percentage of the power capacity without extraction over the proposed case power system peak load is also calculated Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can
121. ave not been included as a separate line item The annual heat gains for a modern district cooling system are in the range of 2 to 3 of all energy delivered These numbers change if the pipe length is short and energy delivered is high Cooling pipe design criteria Design supply temperature The user enters the design supply temperature for the district cooling network Refer to Typical District Cooling Supply and Return Temperatures graph for more information Design return temperature The user enters the design return temperature for the district cooling network A high return temperature is desirable The design return temperature is typically about 12 C Refer to Typical District Cooling Supply and Return Temperatures graph for more information CHP 54 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Differential temperature The model calculates the differential temperature from the difference between design supply and design return temperatures This value is used to calculate the size of the district cooling pipes Main cooling distribution line The main cooling distribution line is the part of the district cooling pipe system that connects several buildings or clusters of buildings to the cooling plant The first section exiting the plant typically has the largest pipe diameter as it has to serve all the buildings The pipe diameter is reduced as the load decreases farther away from the plant Note If the
122. ax It is calculated using the after tax yearly cash flows and the project life After tax Internal Rate of Return assets The model calculates the after tax internal rate of return on assets which represents the true interest yield provided by the project assets over its life after income tax It is calculated using the after tax yearly cash flows and the project life Simple payback The model calculates the simple payback year which represents the length of time that it takes for a proposed project to recoup its own initial cost out of the income or savings it generates The basic premise of the simple payback method is that the more quickly the cost of an investment can be recovered the more desirable is the investment For example in the case of the implementation of an energy project a negative payback period would be an indication that the annual costs incurred are higher than the annual savings generated The simple payback method is not a measure of how profitable one project is compared to another Rather it is a measure of time in the sense that it indicates how many years are required to recover the investment for one project compared to another The simple payback should not be used as the primary indicator to evaluate a project It is useful however as a secondary indicator to indicate the level of risk of an investment A further criticism of the simple payback method is that it does not consider the time value of mo
123. bility The user enters the availability of the power system in either hours or percent of hours per year This value is used to calculate the electricity delivered to load and electricity exported to grid to calculate the suggested capacity for the peak load power system CHP 79 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical values for availability for a new power system range from 8 000 91 3 to 8 400 hours 95 9 per year Used and older equipment might have less availability Reciprocating engine Reciprocating engines produce electricity for the power load using a generator In addition to producing electricity useful heat can be recovered from the exhaust gas using a heat recovery steam generator HRSG or heat recovery system for hot water Heat can also be recovered from the lubricating oil cooler the jacket water cooler and or the charge air cooler and this recovered waste heat can be provided to a heating load Refer to the Reciprocating Engine Schematic for more information Power capacity The user enters the power capacity Typical values for reciprocating engine power capacity are presented in the Typical Reciprocating Engine Power Capacity table The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more inf
124. ble annual land lease costs If the land is not purchased it is necessary to negotiate the use of the land where the project is being implemented In some cases an agreement might be established that a clean energy project is a desirable use of the land and that no land use expenses will be charged to the project developer As an example this may be the case on government owned land However in most cases the landowner requires compensation for use of the land over a fixed period of time Property taxes This cost item summarises the annual costs of property taxes and is often calculated as a percentage of the total estimated initial costs Property taxes might be levied on the proposed case project depending upon the jurisdiction Applicable property taxes have to CHP 140 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model be estimated on a site by site basis and will depend on the property value of the project and or the revenue generated by the project Insurance premium This cost item summarises the annual costs of insurance premium costs and is often calculated as a percentage of the total estimated initial costs As a minimum insurance is required for public liability property damage and equipment failure and business interruption The annual costs for insurance can be significant for an energy project and should be estimated by contacting an insurance broker Parts amp labour The parts amp labour cost item summaris
125. bove cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Fuel handling system In this section the user enters specific costs related to the fuel handling system Delivery equipment The user enters the cost of the fuel delivery equipment Delivery options depend on type of fuel For solid fuel it can include trucks a weight scale a truck unloading system a front end loader etc For gas and liquid fuels it can include a transfer station etc Preparation equipment The user enters the cost of the fuel preparation equipment For solid fuel like biomass it can include a chipper for oversized pieces as well as sorting and screening equipment For liquid fuels it can include filters heating equipment etc For gas fue
126. buted from the central heating plant and or power plant with waste heat recovery to the individual buildings The thermal energy is distributed using networks of insulated underground arterial pipeline main distribution line and branch pipelines secondary distribution lines The network can either be designed as a branched system as shown in the Community System Building Cluster Layout or as a looped system This figure shows how the different building clusters are connected to the main distribution line i e section 1 2 etc Note that the office building cluster 4 and the apartment building cluster 5 are not put in the same building cluster as they have different heating loads If they are put together the secondary pipe size will be incorrect The Community System Base Case Heating System and Heating Load table provides a summary of the heating loads and pipe lengths for the building clusters shown in the Community System Building Cluster Layout Heated floor area for per building zone cluster Heated floor area for building The user enters the total heated floor space for the building For process heating only this value is entered for reference purposes only CHP 35 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heated floor area per building zone The user enters the total heated floor space per building zone A building zone is any number of similar sections of a building connected to a single point of the
127. by 10 to 20 typically costs 1 m to 10 m depending on the measures implemented Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Heating system The heating system as defined here includes the base load intermediate load intermediate load 2 peak load and or back up heating equipment It also includes the heat distribution system components such as distribution piping and trenching and any building interconnection plumbing required In addition the cost for any heating system related energy efficiency measures is also included The user may refer to the RETScreen
128. compressors Typical values of cooling system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling Systems table Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Cooling delivered The model calculates the cooling delivered by the peak load cooling system The percentage of the cooling delivered by the peak load cooling system over the proposed case cooling system energy demand is also calculated Proposed case heating system In this section the user enters the information about the proposed case base load and or intermediate load heating systems See one of the following figures Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load System selection The user selects if the proposed case heating system includes a base load system or a combined base load and intermediate load system CHP 72 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model When Base amp intermediate load system is selected the model assumes that the base load system is operating 100 of the time and that the amount of energy available from the base load system
129. conjunction with the aggregate GHG emission factor to calculate the GHG emissions for each fuel type considered Units switch The user can choose to express the fuel consumption in MWh or in GJ GHG emission factor Standard or Custom analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor each fuel type considered Values are calculated based on the individual emission factors Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco2 MWh which are equivalent GHG emission factor Simplified analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor each fuel type considered Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent GHG emission The model calculates the GHG emission for the base case system by multiplying the fuel consumption by the GHG emission factor Units are given in equivalent tonnes of CO emissions per year tco2 yr Landfill gas potential The model calculates the amount of landfill gas flared and the amount of landfill gas emitted based on values entered in the Tools worksheet Proposed case system GHG summary Project The proposed case system or mitigation system is the proposed project CHP 179 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The proposed case system is normally referred to as the mitigation option in standard economic analysis Fuel type The user enters the fuel types in the
130. ct Combined Heating amp Power Project Combined Cooling amp Power Project Combined Heating amp Cooling Project Combined Cooling Heating amp Power Project For more information on how to use the RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model refer to the CHP Model Flow Chart Note At this point the user should complete the Load amp Network worksheet Proposed case system characteristics The model can evaluate heating cooling and or power projects consisting of various types of equipment as selected by the user in the Equipment Selection and the Energy Model worksheets System designs can consist of base load intermediate load peak load and or back up system depending on the application e g heating The proposed case system characteristics section depending of the proposed project type selected is divided into three sub sections Power Heating and Cooling Only the relevant sections are displayed CHP 17 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Power The proposed case power system analysed can include four main components as follows 1 Base load power system designed to operate under the Operating strategy selected in the Equipment Selection worksheet 2 Intermediate load power system designed to operate under the Operating strategy selected in the Equipment Selection worksheet The base load power system is assumed to operate at full power capacity output when there is a base and an i
131. ct can be considered as a small scale CDM project i e the capacity of a renewable energy system does not exceed 15 MW or the aggregate energy savings by an energy efficiency improvement project does not exceed the equivalent of 15 GWh per year Note that this option will automatically be hidden in RETScreen for non CDM projects or for potential CDM projects that exceed the small scale CDM project size limits Simplified rules and procedures are available for small scale CDM projects if it can be demonstrated that one of the barriers identified by the UNFCCC has been overcome in order to implement the project These simplifications will allow the use of standardized baselines streamlined monitoring procedures a simpler Project Design Document and Portions of this text were adapted from the UNFCCC s document Guide to the Climate Convention and its Kyoto Protocol available at UNFCCC s Website CHP 169 RETScreen Software Online User Manual reduced registration fees all of which reduce transaction costs so that small scale projects can offer CERs at more competitive prices The RETScreen GHG Analysis worksheet can be used to calculate the baseline for a small scale CDM project directly in conjunction with Appendix B of the document Simplified modalities and procedures for small scale CDM project activities which is available at the UNFCCC s CDM Website This appendix contains indicative simplified baseline and monito
132. d Note The heating design temperature values found in the RETScreen Online Weather Database were calculated based on hourly data for 12 months of the year The user might want to overwrite this value depending on local conditions For example where temperatures are measured at airports the heating design temperature could be 1 to 2 C warmer in core areas of large cities The user should be aware that if they choose to modify the heating design temperature the monthly degree days and the heating loads might have to be adjusted accordingly Annual heating degree days below 18 C The model calculates the total annual heating degree days below 18 C 65 F by summing the monthly degree days entered by the user Degree days for a given day represent the number of Celsius degrees that the mean temperature is above or below a CHP 33 RETScreen Software Online User Manual given base Thus heating degree days are the number of degrees below 18 C The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displayed Domestic hot water heating base demand The user enters the estimated domestic hot water DHW heating base demand as a percentage of the total heating needs excluding process heating In cold climates typical values for domestic hot water heating base demand range from 0 to 25 A
133. d Cycle Schematic for more information Operating pressure The user enters the operating pressure of the steam turbine Refer to the Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperatures table for information Saturation temperature The model calculates the steam saturation temperature The saturation temperature is the boiling point at the selected steam operating pressure Superheated temperature The user enters the superheated temperature of the steam If superheated steam is not required the user enters the saturation temperature calculated by the model Superheated steam is defined as steam heated to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature while maintaining the saturation pressure It cannot exist in contact with water nor contain water and resembles a perfect gas Superheated steam might be called surcharged steam anhydrous steam or steam gas It increases the steam turbine efficiency Superheating of the steam also means that smaller size pipes can be used for the steam distribution system Steam flow The model calculates the steam flow based on the heating capacity after duct firing if applicable and the temperature at the back pressure port This value is another way to express the steam turbine capacity Typical values for steam flow range from 1 000 kg h 150 kW to 2 500 000 kg h 1 000 MW CHP 88 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Enthalpy The model calculates the en
134. d fuel cost as entered and or calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet This section also summarises the proposed case system capacity energy delivered end use energy rate and fuel cost as entered and or calculated in the Energy Model and Equipment Selection worksheets The total fuel cost for the base case and proposed case systems is also calculated Financial parameters The items entered here are used to perform calculations in this Financial Summary worksheet Values for each parameter will depend on the perspective of the user e g utility vs independent power producer General Fuel cost escalation rate The user enters the fuel cost escalation rate which is the projected annual average rate of increase in base case and proposed case fuel costs over the life of the project This permits the user to apply rates of inflation to fuel costs which might be different from general inflation For example in North America long term fuel cost escalation rates range anywhere from 0 to 5 with 2 to 3 being the most common values CHP 145 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Inflation rate The user enters the inflation rate which is the projected annual average rate of inflation over the life of the project For example inflation for the next 25 years in North America is currently forecasted to range between 2 and 3 Discount rate The user enters the discount rate which is the rate used to disco
135. d heating system 2 capacity if required from the proposed case heating system peak load calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet Capacity The user enters the capacity of the peak load heating system If the capacity entered is below the model s suggested capacity of the peak load heating system then it is assumed that the system cannot meet the peak heating load at design conditions and the calculations made by the model will not be accurate Note that the System design graph can be used as a guide The percentage of the peak load heating system capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information CHP 27 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the peak load heating system The percentage of the heating delivered by the peak load heating system over the proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the peak load heating system Th
136. d on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the steam boiler This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for steam turbine boilers range from 75 to 85 based on HHV natural gas fuel Return temperature The user enters the return temperature or feedwater temperature for the steam turbine which is the temperature of the condensed steam at the back pressure and extraction port The return temperature is typically around 110 C Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the return temperature the steam flow the superheated temperature and the seasonal efficiency Heating capacity without extraction The model calculates the heating capacity without extraction based on the steam flow pressure and temperature at the back pressure port and return temperature The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the CHP 98 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Powe
137. d range from 40 to 120 W m Peak process heating load The user enters the peak process heating load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This value depends on the process type and size used in the building but it is assumed to be weather independent If the process heating load or a portion of it is weather dependent e g lumber drying kiln it can be entered as part of the heating load for building building zone or building cluster Process heating load characteristics The user selects the process heating load characteristics from the drop down list The Detailed option allows the user to enter the percentage of time the process is operating on a monthly basis in the Base case load characteristics section located at the bottom of this worksheet If the Standard option is selected the process load is assumed to be the same for each month of the year and is calculated based on the peak process heating load and the equivalent full load hours for the process heating load Equivalent full load hours process heating The equivalent full load hours for the process heating load is defined as the annual process heating demand divided by the peak process heating load This value is expressed in hours and is equivalent to the number of hours that a heating system sized exactly for the peak process heating load would operate at rated capacity to meet the annual process heating demand If the Standard option for t
138. d to demonstrate and prove the adequate performance of the equipment Commissioning will involve between 1 and 8 people for 1 to 30 days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 per person day depending on the size of the project Contingencies The allowance made for contingency costs depends on the level of accuracy of the cost estimates Contingencies are estimated based on a user selected percentage of the sub total of all project costs excluding interest during construction Note that contingencies are incremental in the sense that they are derived from project costs including any credits The allowance for contingency items should be based on the level of accuracy associated with the RETScreen Pre feasibility or Feasibility estimate of the project costs Typically a Pre feasibility level cost analysis should be accurate within or 40 to 50 and a Feasibility level cost analysis should be accurate within or 15 to 25 However this accuracy will depend on the expertise of the study team the scale of the project being considered the level of effort put forward to complete the pre feasibility or feasibility study and the availability of accurate information It is certainly possible that the CHP 139 RETScreen Software Online User Manual RETScreen user experienced with project development could estimate costs in the range of 5 to 40 of the total initial project costs Interest during construction Interest during cons
139. d to run the model the Introduction worksheet and Blank Worksheets 3 are included in the Excel Workbook file The Introduction worksheet provides the user with a quick overview of the model Blank Worksheets 3 are provided to allow the user to prepare a customised RETScreen project analysis For example the worksheets can be used to enter more details about the project to prepare graphs and to perform a more detailed sensitivity analysis CHP 14 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Energy Model As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software the Energy Model worksheet presents the proposed case system summary fuel types fuel consumption capacity and energy delivered based upon system characteristics and calculations in the Load amp Network Design and Equipment Selection worksheets Results are calculated in common megawatt hour MWh units for easy comparison of different technologies and fuels Settings For more information on how to use the RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power CHP Project Model refer to the CHP Model Flow Chart and the Proposed project section The user selects the language of the online manual from the drop down list For more information on how to use the RETScreen Online User Manual Product Database and Weather Database see Data amp help access Unit Options amp Fuel Value Reference Language Langue The user selects a language from the drop down list L
140. dcsinssusssodesbosvesstenbencosccesesossubeadecdassnsuits soddsscossssoccboadacdeadeisScesscdacdecssiactey LO Prod ct DACA soci cesses cetsazisacatocensasdcassadsancacgatsccesacsoessaxedbasdosasbeuseasouseesdobocssanbscebsceoutaneasaces COU Weather DATA suscsicectesesiccessespcspcseducenecedosssncsusssnaves ree EED EEEo Prae Ee OEEO Soa EEn E eae Cost Datasssscssssesssioososssssiresestosss sss sscrostssosrosis sosete tios tessi Osee s srr cS settes sste iSo EE EE AZ Figures amp Tables occ cscs caiescecisincss cena aesnedecvcncsesecsveuseveesesecoes sxesncoceossevsnesguncoecesnovsneueauesteve 2 2 Training amp SUP DOU vicaiescxdiceseccsucdecdcscccscsvocsvvanedeaccssenncvonsedepugnciiecadeusuduansecvvecdersesanesseuocasss2OD Terms Of USC i ssdesssuisccsssischesstvavsbuvcbsacudsloiasesseteedersessusinncdsedusadvasdoussbashessescuvivneisasonsbeaserrsisnn LOO Bibliography wes scectlivaisesavindedsoolusacdeesdsdc deatsitavicdesseadeisecasbauscccadeiuttssecdedsossasebisssded ddsatacidy LOO NUON RE R E E E ET RRO 20 U CHP 3 RETScreen Software Online User Manual LIST OF FIGURES amp TABLES Weather Database MapPi ssss ss sissssssssssessscsssssssssssooseosssossocsssesssosssssssssssessosssesssssessosssststss 224 Heating Only Projectores iostais ssecent rooe stern ea iosa otea see bosoke odas e rsss 224 Power Only Project seccecssdecsesdesvcceacs ecccavsseedsvasdeskeuosgevesssnssceqesvaedcve suessesessetvevscsecedsciaeces 224 Coolin Only Proj
141. district heating network A low return temperature is desirable Lower return temperatures make it possible to reduce pipe sizes and achieve higher efficiencies for waste heat recovery For older buildings the winter return temperature is likely to be around 75 C For new systems designed to minimise the return temperature 55 C can be achieved Refer to the Typical District Heating Supply and Return Temperatures graph for more information Medium Temperature MT return is typical for district heating systems with old and new buildings Low Temperature LT return represents a system with buildings specifically designed for district heating and optimisation of the return temperature High temperature district heating systems are very rare Differential temperature The model calculates the differential temperature from the difference between design supply and design return temperatures This value is used to calculate the size of the district heating pipes Main heating distribution line The main heating distribution line is the part of the district heating pipe system that connects several buildings or clusters of buildings to the heating plant and or power plant with waste heat recovery The first section exiting the plant typically has the largest pipe diameter as it has to serve all the buildings The pipe diameter is reduced as the load decreases farther away from the plant The type of pipe can change from steel to plastic if the s
142. dit rate could take For example a range of 10 for a CE production credit rate of 0 05 kWh means that the CE production credit rate could take any value between 0 045 kWh and 0 055 kWh CHP 189 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Since 0 05 kWh is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the CE production credit rate is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 GHG reduction credit rate The GHG reduction credit rate is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the GHG reduction credit rate range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated GHG reduction credit rate value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the GHG reduction credit rate could take For example a range of 10 for a GHG reduction credit rate of 5 tco2 means that the GHG reduction credit rate could take any value between 4 5 tco2 and 5 5 tco2 Since 5 tco2 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the GHG reduction cr
143. e e l 500 250 0 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Month ote Heating lt i Power amp Cooling J Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load 1 500 1 250 1 000 7 z x 50 O gs O Peak load power 00 250 0 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Month te Heating E Power Cooling he CHP 228 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load T ol Base load heating M AF fay j f t N Month t Heating E Power Cooling S 4 Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load Peak load heating Intermediate load heating Load kW Base load heating Mar Apr May Jun ju Aug Sep Oct No De Month te Heating 0 Power Cooling CHP 229 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate Intermediate 2 amp Peak Load Peak load heating Intermediate load heating Load kW Base load heating Month ste Heating E Power Cooling Cooling System Load Definition k ge is cml i Peak load T cooling A Base load cooling Fet Mar Apr May Jun Ju Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Month te Heating lt Power Cooling 4 CHP 230 RETScreen Combined Heat am
144. e which is the temperature of the condensed steam at the back pressure and extraction port CHP 92 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The return temperature is typically around 110 C Heating capacity without extraction The model calculates the heating capacity without extraction based on the steam flow pressure and temperature at the back pressure port and return temperature The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Heating capacity with extraction The model calculates the heating capacity with extraction if an extraction port is included based on the steam flow maximum extraction pressure and temperature at the extraction port pressure and temperature at the back pressure port and return temperature The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Steam turbine Steam turbines produce electricity for the power load using a generator Heat can be recovered from the extraction port and back
145. e if a community studied requires a 500 kW cooling system but there is a plan to add additional housing that would require an additional load of 50 kW an oversizing factor of 10 would ensure that the new housing can be connected at a later date The oversizing factor is also used to test how much extra load the selected system can accommodate This is achieved by changing the factor until the pipe size is increased If the pipe sizes change when the oversizing factor is 15 this indicates that the selected system can handle 15 more load without having to change the size of the pipes Secondary network pipes are not oversized if for example the new buildings that are intended to be connected in the future will be independent of the existing secondary lines Length of pipe section The user enters the length of each building cluster section of the secondary distribution line In a cluster of buildings of the same size the user should insert the total length of pipe used to connect to the main distribution line The length refers to trench length with two pipes For more information see the Technical note on cooling network design Pipe size The model calculates the pipe size for each building load of the building cluster Note that the pipe size is selected using the oversizing factor The selection of pipe size for this model uses a simplified method The pipe sizing criteria used allows a pressure drop for the maximum flow between 1 to 2
146. e User Manual Secondary distribution line pipe cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the secondary distribution line pipe costs for all pipes connecting each cluster to the main distribution pipe are calculated by the model using the Typical Costs for Heating Distribution Line Pipes graph If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the secondary distribution pipes cost per building cluster The model then calculates the total cost for all building clusters The costs shown are for the supply and installation of the supply and return pipes i e 2 pipes per meter of trench The cost per meter is for two pre insulated district heating type pipes in a trench approximately 600 mm deep It also includes the cost for the replacement of existing sidewalks Rocky terrain or installations in areas that have many old utility services e g telephone electricity sewage water etc could increase the calculated cost substantially Typical secondary distribution line pipe costs can be broken down as follows 45 for material 45 for installation and 10 for associated distribution pump system Total building cluster connection cost The model calculates the total building cluster connection cost based on the ETS and secondary pipes costs per building cluster and for all the building clusters Summary of main distribution line pipe size The model summarises the pipe sizes specified in the main dis
147. e fuel cost range for the proposed case The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated fuel cost value for the proposed case The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the fuel cost for the proposed case could take For example a range of 10 for fuel cost for the proposed case of 300 000 means that the fuel cost for the proposed case could take any value between 270 000 and 330 000 Since 300 000 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the fuel cost for the proposed case is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Fuel cost Base case The annual fuel cost for the base case is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the fuel cost range for the base case The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated fuel cost value for the base case The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the fuel cost for the base case could take For example a range of 10 for fuel cost for the base case of 300 000 means that the fuel cost for the base ca
148. e infiltration of precipitation through the landfill cover the initial moisture content of the waste the design of the leachate collection system and the depth of waste in the site influence the moisture content of waste within a landfill Typical values for k range from 0 02 for dry sites to 0 07 for wet sites Typical values of k are presented in the Range of k Values by Annual Precipitation table Methane by volume of LFG The user enters the percentage of methane in the landfill gas on a volume basis This value is used to calculate the Methane generation from waste Lo value as well as the landfill gas methane emission factor It is typical practice to assume that the landfill gas generated consists of 50 methane and 50 carbon dioxide by volume Methane generation from waste Lo The user enters the volume of methane generation from waste Lo per tonne of waste deposited The methane generation from waste value represents the total yield of methane that will be produced by the waste deposited Also referred to as the Lo value it is dependent on the composition of the waste in particular the fraction of organic matter present The Lo value is selected based on an estimation of the carbon content of the waste the biodegradable carbon fraction and a stoichiometric conversion factor Typical values for this parameter range from 125 m of methane tonne of waste for moderately decomposable waste to 310 m of methane tonne of wa
149. e load characteristics 37 38 51 60 62 216 217 Base case power system e cee eeeeeete cee eneeeeee 60 Base case system GHG summary Baseline 165 177 Base case system load characteristics graph 64 Base load cooling system eee 29 68 Base load heating system e 23 24 73 Base load power system 00 18 79 111 Baseline changes during project life 176 BG B11 EE EAEE OEE EEE AO EEE 214 Benefit Cost B C ratio ccceccecsseceseeeneees 162 Bibliography ce eeeeeceseeeesseceeeeecneeeeceeeeeeens 268 Biomass SYStOM assessino et 73 Blank Worksheets 3 cccscccesssseeeeeeee 14 164 BOWersctiis thence ied see east oth SE 73 74 Boiler type isscdei eedsentisiess day cecssesdoedseenieeaeereseaeae 74 Brief description amp model flow chart 8 Building amp yard Construction cece 138 Building Cooling Load Chart 5 51 238 Building Heating Load Chart 5 37 238 C Capacity 19 21 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 61 69 71 73 75 80 104 105 106 215 249 253 269 Capacity Charge 0 ceescesesessseeesseereeseeneeees 215 Capacity factor 104 105 106 Carbon 120 123 165 198 201 202 269 Carbon dioxide 0 eeceeseesececeeseeereeeeeeeeeees 202 Carbon monoxide ceccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 CE production 153 154 160 189 190 CE
150. e model Yellow User input required to run the model User input required to run the model and online databases available User input for reference purposes only Not required to run the model RETScreen Cell Colour Coding CHP 10 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Currency options To perform a RETScreen project analysis the user may select a currency of their choice from the Currency cell in the Energy Model worksheet The user selects the currency in which the monetary data of the project will be reported For example if the user selects all monetary related items are expressed in Selecting User defined allows the user to specify the currency manually by entering a name or symbol in the additional input cell that appears adjacent to the currency switch cell The currency may be expressed using a maximum of three characters US etc To facilitate the presentation of monetary data this selection may also be used to reduce the monetary data by a factor e g reduced by a factor of a thousand hence k 1 000 instead of 1 000 000 If None is selected all monetary data are expressed without units Hence where monetary data is used together with other units e g kWh the currency code is replaced with a hyphen kWh The user may also select a country to obtain the International Standard Organisation ISO three letter country currency code For
151. e model assumes that the capitalised costs of the project as specified by the depreciation tax basis are depreciated with a constant rate over the depreciation period The portion of initial costs not capitalised is deemed to be expensed during the year of construction i e year 0 For both declining balance and straight line depreciation the model assumes that the full depreciation allowed for a given year is always taken Also the model does not incorporate the half year rule used in some countries and according to which depreciation is calculated over only half of the capitalised cost during the first year of operation of the equipment Depreciation tax basis The user enters the depreciation tax basis which is used to specify which portion of the initial costs are capitalised and can be depreciated for tax purposes The remaining portion is deemed to be fully expensed during the year of construction year 0 For example if a project costs 20 000 to evaluate feasibility study and develop and 80 000 to design engineering build install and commission the user could enter 80 CHP 149 RETScreen Software Online User Manual as the depreciation tax basis in order to depreciate only the engineering energy system balance of system and miscellaneous costs while the feasibility and development costs would be fully expensed during year 0 Depreciation rate The user enters the depreciation rate which is the rate
152. e of 0 90 to 0 95 If the mixture quality is too low there could be erosion of the steam turbine blades due to the collision of the water droplets and the turbine blades thus increasing the cost of maintenance of the power system Increasing the extraction pressure increases the mixture quality If the extraction pressure cannot be increased more than one steam turbine has to be used in conjunction with a reheater or a moisture separator This will help reduce ongoing maintenance costs but will increase the initial cost of equipment Enthalpy The model calculates the enthalpy of the steam at the output of the extraction port Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat content of a substance Theoretical steam rate TSR The model calculates the theoretical steam rate TSR of the extracted steam which represents the theoretical amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Back pressure The user enters the steam turbine back pressure or exhaust pressure The higher the back pressure is the higher the heating capacity is at the back pressure port and the lower the power capacity is and vice versa Temperature The model calculates the temperature of the steam at the back pressure port which is the saturation temperature at the back pressure CHP 95 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Mixture quality The model calculates steam moisture mixture quality at the output of the back pressure port If the mixture q
153. e on cooling network design The selection of pipe size for this model uses a simplified method The pipe sizing criteria used allows a pressure drop for the maximum flow between 1 to 2 millibar meter The maximum velocity in larger pipes is maximised to 3 m s Before construction it is necessary to verify that the selected pipe system will be able to withstand all relevant actions and fulfil the safety and functional requirements during its entire service life The CHP 55 RETScreen Software Online User Manual final pipe size needs to be verified using detailed calculations including pipe length and factor in the number of valves connection points elbows etc Total pipe length for main distribution line The model calculates the total pipe length for the main cooling distribution network The length refers to trench length with two pipes Secondary cooling distribution lines The secondary distribution lines are the parts of the district cooling pipe system that connect individual buildings to the main distribution line If the system consists only of one building connected to the plant this pipe is considered a secondary line Secondary pipe network oversizing The user enters a pipe network oversizing factor The pipes are then automatically sized for a load that is increased by the oversizing factor entered by the user Pipe oversizing is used if it is expected that the system load will increase in the future For exampl
154. e presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems table The first 3 listed are based on HHV natural gas fuel CHP 26 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Peak load heating system The peak load heating system is designed to meet the remaining heating demand not met by the base load the intermediate load and or the intermediate load 2 heating system either due to insufficient installed capacity or to cover scheduled shutdowns Type The user selects the type of the peak load heating system considered from the drop down list Selecting Not required will hide the entire peak load heating system section However if Not required is selected and the Suggested capacity by the model is greater than 0 the calculations made by the model will not be accurate Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the peak load heating system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the peak load heating system Suggested capacity The model calculates the suggested capacity of the peak load heating system This value is calculated by subtracting the base load heating system capacity as well as the intermediate load heating system capacity and the intermediate loa
155. e time required by experts to complete the necessary work It can involve between 5 and 300 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 depending upon the scale and complexity of the project As an example CHP plants in the 30 MW scale range will be at the high end of this range while a small system might require a much lower effort of approximately 5 to 20 person days Tenders amp contracting Upon completion of the various engineering tasks tender documents usually are prepared for the purpose of selecting contractors to undertake the work Once tenders are released the contracting process is required to both negotiate and establish contracts for the completion of the project The cost of the tendering and contracting process should be based on an estimate of the time required by professionals to complete the necessary work It can involve between 5 and 300 person days depending on the complexity of the project at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 As an example CHP plants in the 30 MW range will be at the high end of this range while a small system may require a much lower effort of approximately 5 to 20 person days CHP 127 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Construction supervision The construction supervision cost item summarises the estimated costs associated with ensuring that the project is constructed as designed Construction supervision is provided either by the consultant overseeing the project or
156. eCticssssssscssisssvsssessosssiesrirssssssossoe sssr sesiis ossea sitst viest so risoto eae 225 Combined Heating amp Power Project eesssesssecssecssecssocesoosesocsssecesocesocessocesseessecssooee 225 Combined Cooling amp Power Project eesssessseessecssocssocesoocessccssecssocesooseoosesseessocesoose 226 Combined Heating amp Cooling Project esssesssecssecesocesocesocessscessecssocesoosssossssecssocssosse 226 Combined Cooling Heating amp Power Project e sseeesooesoocesoesssccssocesocesoocessecsoocssooee 227 Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load oeesooesoocssoccssccssocssocesoossssesssee 228 Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load ses00e 228 Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak L0ad ccsssccssssccssssccssssccessees 229 Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load 0s0008 229 Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate Intermediate 2 amp Peak Load sscccssssssscsssssseccssssscccesseees 230 Cooling System Load Definition isc dscccsessciiovsssscsesssecsessedsseoosssveeecs decseeeessveoss sdesecdeasecees 230 Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines LHV lt 6MW cccscsssseseees 231 Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines HHV lt 6MW cccccccseeseees 231 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW cscscsccscscessssss
157. eased by the oversizing factor entered by the user Pipe oversizing is used if it is expected that the system load will increase in the future For example if a community studied requires a 500 kW heating system but there is a plan to add additional housing that would require an additional load of 50 kW an oversizing factor of 10 would ensure that the new housing can be connected at a later date The oversizing factor is also used to test how much extra load the selected system can accommodate This is achieved by changing the factor until the pipe size is increased If the pipe sizes change when the oversizing factor is 15 this indicates that the selected system can handle 15 more load without having to change the size of the pipes Secondary network pipes are not oversized if for example the new buildings that are intended to be connected in the future will be independent of the existing secondary lines Length of pipe section The user enters the length of each building cluster section of the secondary distribution line In a cluster of buildings of the same size the user should insert the total length of pipe used to connect to the main distribution line The length refers to trench length with two pipes For more information see the Technical note on heating network design Pipe size The model calculates the pipe size for each building load of the building cluster Note that the pipe size is selected using the oversizing factor
158. ed capacity typically includes a derating factor Note To see all the suppliers listed in the product database and their contact information the user can open the product database using the icon in the RETScreen menu bar or toolbar The product database is distributed for informational purposes only and does not necessarily reflect the views of the Government of Canada nor constitute an endorsement of any commercial product or person Neither Canada nor its ministers officers employees or agents make any warranty in respect to this database or assumes any liability arising out of this database CHP 220 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Product manufacturers interested in having their products listed in the product database can reach RETScreen International at RETScreen International CANMET Energy Technology Centre Varennes Natural Resources Canada 1615 Lionel Boulet P O Box 4800 Varennes Quebec CANADA J3X 1S6 Tel 1 450 652 4621 Fax 1 450 652 5177 E mail rets nrcan gc ca CHP 221 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Weather Data This database includes some of the weather data required in the model To access the weather database the user may refer to Data amp help access While running the software the user may obtain weather data from ground monitoring stations and or from NASA s satellite data Ground monitoring stations data is obtained by making a selection for
159. ed case power system by adding the proposed case power net average load and power for cooling load on a monthly basis CHP 65 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Cooling system load The model calculates the monthly average cooling system load for the proposed case cooling system by multiplying the base case cooling system average cooling load on a monthly basis by the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures for cooling Heating net average load The model calculates the net monthly average heating load for the proposed case heating system by multiplying the base case heating system average heating load on a monthly basis by the end use energy efficiency measures for heating Heat for cooling The model calculates the monthly average heat load required by the cooling system equipment selected in the Equipment Selection worksheet Heating system load The model calculates the monthly average heating system load for the proposed case heating system by adding the proposed case heating net average load and heat for cooling load on a monthly basis Peak load annual The model calculates the annual peak load Proposed case system load characteristics graph The proposed case system load characteristics graph shows the proposed case average load profile for the power cooling and or heating systems on a monthly basis Proposed case load and demand The model summarises the proposed case load and demand for the p
160. ed in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines LHV lt 6MW Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines HHV lt 6MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW CHP 61 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Annual O amp M cost The user enters the annual operating and maintenance O amp M cost for the base case power system e g lubricants plant staff etc Electricity rate base case The model calculates the average e
161. edit rate is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Net GHG reduction credit duration The net GHG reduction for the credit duration is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the net GHG reduction range for the credit duration The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated net GHG reduction value for the credit duration The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the net GHG reduction for the credit duration could take For example a range of 10 for net GHG reduction for the credit duration of 10 000 equivalent tonnes of CO emissions means that the net GHG reduction for the credit duration could take any value between 9 000 and 11 000 tonnes Since 10 000 tonnes is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the net GHG reduction for the credit duration is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 CHP 190 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Debt ratio The debt ratio is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the debt ratio
162. eeeeeeee 267 Load amp Network Design 05 14 15 33 Loss carryforward sesser 148 Lower heating value LHV 16 17 196 199 200 203 212 M Main cooling distribution line 55 133 Main cooling distribution line pipe 133 Main distribution line pipe cost factor 44 58 Main heating distribution line 41 131 Main heating distribution line pipe 131 Main pipe network oversizing 0 42 55 Manufacturer 21 26 28 70 72 73 75 81 83 86 97 99 102 104 105 106 108 220 Maximum extraction cccccccsseceeeesseeeens 89 94 Maximum within level of confidence 193 194 Mechanical design ceesseeecsecseeeeeneeeeeeee 126 Median seu crests e a e S 193 Methane cccccscceseeesteeeeees 201 204 206 207 Methane by volume of LFG 206 207 Methane generation constant k 0 206 Methane generation from waste Lo 206 207 Metric or Imperial units eee eee eeeteeeeee 16 Minimum capacity 80 83 85 97 100 101 107 Minimum load isolated grid eee 60 Minimum within level of confidence 193 194 Mixture quality ceeceeeeeeeee 89 90 95 96 Model 8 9 11 12 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 45 47 48 50 58 61 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 80 81 83 85 86 97 99 101 102
163. een Higher heating value HHV or Lower heating value LHV by clicking on the appropriate radio button The user should not change this selection once the analysis has started Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the CHP 16 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Higher heating value is typically used in Canada and USA while lower heating value is used in the rest of the world Refer to the Heating value amp fuel rate section in the Tools worksheet to calculate the heating value for various fuels on a dry basis Proposed project The user selects the proposed project type considered from the seven options in the drop down list Heating only Power only Cooling only Combined heating amp power Combined cooling amp power Combined heating amp cooling or Combined cooling heating amp power Note that the use of the word power means electricity generation in the RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power CHP Project Model See one of the following figures Heating Only Project Power Only Project Cooling Only Proje
164. eet CHP 12 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Saving a file To save a RETScreen Workbook file standard Cll Excel saving procedures should be used The EE EEEE original Excel Workbook file for each RETScreen model can not be saved under its original distribution name This is done so that the user does not save over the master file Instead the user should use the File Save As option The user can then save the file on a hard drive diskette CD etc However it is recommended to save the files in the MyFiles directory automatically set by the RETScreen installer program on the hard drive RETScreen MyFiles WIND3 xls The download procedure is presented in the following figure The user may also visit the RETScreen Website at www retscreen net for more information on the download procedure It is important to note that the user should not change directory names or the file organisation automatically set by RETScreen installer program Also the main RETScreen program file and the Z other files in the Program directory should not be moved Otherwise the user may not be able to j i access the RETScreen Online User Manual or the RETScreen Weather and Product Databases RETScreen Download Procedure Printing a file To print a RETScreen Workbook file standard Excel printing procedures should be used The workbooks have been formatted for printing the worksheets on standard
165. efit from a clean energy production credit in the Proposed case system summary section at the bottom of the Energy Model worksheet CE production credit rate The user enters the Clean Energy CE production credit rate This value typically represents the amount that can be credited to the project in exchange of the production generated by the clean energy delivered by the proposed case system It is used in conjunction with the clean energy production to calculate the annual CE production income CE production credits are most common for electricity generation from clean energy projects For example it is possible to receive a tax credit of 1 5 kWh in the USA for electricity produced from wind biomass or chicken manure power projects Whether or not a given project would qualify to receive such payments depends on the rules of the specific programs in the jurisdiction in which the system is installed This value is assumed to be representative of year 0 i e the development year prior to the first year of operation year 1 The model escalates the CE production credit rate yearly according to the CE production credit escalation rate starting from year 1 and throughout the CE production credit duration CE production income The model calculates the annual Clean Energy CE production income This value is calculated by multiplying the CE production and the CE production credit rate The CHP 153 RETScreen Software Online User Ma
166. efore these values cannot be plotted If the user makes any changes to the input range values or navigates through any of the other worksheets the Click here to calculate risk analysis button will reappear and the impact graph the distribution graph and the bar graph will be crossed out showing that the risk analysis calculations have to be updated CHP 194 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Bar graph The bar graph summarises the maximum and minimum financial indicator values that can be expected according to the level of risk defined by the user If the user makes any changes to the input range values or navigates through any of the other worksheets the Click here to calculate risk analysis button will reappear and the impact graph the distribution graph and the bar graph will be crossed out showing that the risk analysis calculations have to be updated CHP 195 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Tools As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software an optional Tools worksheet is provided to help the user calculate a number of different values such as the amount of methane gas available from a landfill site Settings The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not one or more of the optional Tools will be used If the user ticks the box the selected Tool will open User defined fuel This tool is used to define the User defined fuel selected by the
167. egree days and the cooling loads might have to be adjusted accordingly CHP 47 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Annual cooling degree days above 10 C The model calculates the total annual cooling degree days above 10 C 50 F by summing the monthly degree days entered by the user Degree days for a given day represent the number of Celsius degrees that the mean temperature is above or below a given base Thus cooling degree days are the number of degrees above 10 C The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displayed Non weather dependent cooling The user enters the estimated non weather dependent cooling demand as a percentage of the total cooling needs excluding process cooling Non weather dependent loads can be cold storage for food or cooling for computer server rooms Typical values for base load cooling range from 5 to 30 If no non weather dependent cooling is required the user enters 0 Selecting process cooling only without space cooling for Base case cooling system will hide this cell Equivalent full load hours The model calculates the equivalent full load hours which is defined as the annual total cooling demand divided by the total peak cooling load for a specific location This value is expressed in hours and is equivalent to the number of hours
168. em s total peak heating load that is reduced as a result of implementing the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures This value is used to calculate the heating system average load in the Proposed case load characteristics section at the bottom of this worksheet as well as the net peak heating load and the net heating demand for the proposed case system Typical values range from 0 to 25 depending on the measures implemented Note These proposed case end use energy efficiency measures are in addition to the improvements in energy efficiency that result from implementing the proposed case system as calculated in the other worksheets For example as part of implementing a new cooling heating and or power system the user might also want to implement other measures such as improved building insulation that reduce the load that the new proposed case system will have to meet Net peak heating load The model calculates the annual net peak heating load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the instantaneous heat required from the proposed case heating system to meet the largest space heating load including domestic hot water CHP 39 RETScreen Software Online User Manual and or process heating load after the implementation of the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures It typically coincides with the coldest day of the year for space heating applications Net heating demand The
169. emand not met by the base and intermediate load heating systems 4 Peak load heating system typically designed to meet only a small portion of the annual heating demand that occurs during peak periods and or 5 Back up heating system optional which is used in case of interruption of the other systems See the following figures Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate Intermediate 2 amp Peak Load CHP 23 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Base load heating system The user enters the information about the base load heating system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet When the proposed project is Combined heating amp power or Combined cooling heating amp power the base load heating is assumed by the model to be provided by the base load power system via waste heat recovery Type The user selects the base load heating system type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Capacity The user enters the capacity of the base load heating system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the base load heating system capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calcula
170. ematic 5 69 245 CHP 270 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Construction SUPETVISION cesses eeeeeeeeee 128 Contingencies neiseis aoe 139 143 Contract negotiations 122 Cooled floor area for building ee eee 49 Cooled floor area for per building zone cluster EEA mietinnstha iaehiiaisen itil sivas 49 Cooled floor area per building cluster 50 Cooled floor area per building zone 49 Cooling 4 17 29 30 31 47 49 50 51 54 58 59 63 66 68 70 72 132 151 152 157 225 226 227 230 237 238 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 259 Cooling time process operating 63 Cooling average load 63 Cooling delivered cceceecees 30 31 70 72 Cooling design temperature ee eeeeeeees 47 Cooling equipment 0 eee eeeeecteeeeeeeeeeeees 132 Cooling load calculation eeeeeeeseeeeenees 50 Cooling load for building zone cluster 50 Cooling Only Project eee 4 17 225 Cooling pipe design criteria eee eeeeeeeeees 54 Cooling premium rebate ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 151 Cooling premium income rebate 152 Cooling Project 0 ce eeeeceseceeesecseeeeetecneeereaeeees 47 Cooling system 66 132 157 Cooling system load 0 0 ceeeeseeeceeneeeeeneeeees 66 Cooling System Load Definition 4 29 68 230 Copyright amp trademark 266 Cost Analysis 12 14 23 29 32 62 113 116
171. ence purposes only Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel CHP 107 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy
172. ence purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Operating pressure The user enters the operating pressure of the steam turbine Refer to the Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperature table for information CHP 99 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Saturation temperature The model calculates the steam saturation temperature The saturation temperature is the boiling point at the selected steam operating pressure Steam temperature The user enters the steam temperature which represents the temperature at which the steam is extracted from the earth Back pressure The user enters the steam turbine back pressure or exhaust pressure Steam turbine ST efficiency The user enters the steam turbine ST efficiency This value includes the losses in the steam turbine for auxiliary power and system losses Typical values for steam turbine efficiency range from 70 to 80 Large steam turbines typically have higher efficiencies than small steam turbines See one of the following figures Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat Actual steam rate ASR The model calculates the actual steam rate ASR for the geothermal system based on the steam flow steam temperature back pressure and turbine efficiency This value represents the act
173. ent Temperature cccsccssssccssssccssssccsssees 252 Full Power Capacity Outputs cisicscinciccwveess ccssehedis evict cctv veer ei ars 253 Power Load Following secesssooscssosecesosecssssoosessooceesoocessosecessscosessooeeesosecesssocssssoossssoose 253 Heating Load Following e ssocesesesecesssccesssoosessoceessooecessoccesssooecesooeessssecessscossssoosessosse 254 BOPP CIO MIC YC CU AUN ai osece basco ieaicssncdciveeceeacecsusucapsen gesacanesecaesececeuesencssavesssesqusuveuerocnceee 254 CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation ccssccsessees 255 Accuracy of Project Cost Estimates sscessisssccissscscesceticeecsxecncagcaoecaveis cones cxbececenseeeedesaseece 255 Reciprocating Engine Installed Cost Examples cccssccssssscssssccssssccsssscssscssssssees 256 Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples lt SMW ccsccssssscssssscssssccssssccessscsssssccsssssees 256 Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 5 to SOM W cscccsssssssssscssscccsssccesssssessecees 257 Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 50 to 300 MW ssccssssscssssccssssccssssccsssssees 257 Steam Turbine Installed Cost Examples ccssccsssscssssscssssscssssccssssccsssscssssssssssssees 258 Fuel Cell Installed Cost Examplles csssccssssccsssscssssssssssscsssscssscsssssscsssssssssssscsessees 258 Estimated Transmission Line Costs sesseseosossessosoesossossesossossesossoesessosoesossossesos
174. enter a range of 0 Electricity export rate The electricity export rate is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the electricity export rate range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated electricity export rate value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the electricity export rate could take For example a range of 10 for electricity export rate of 100 MWh means that the electricity export rate could take any value between 90 MWh and 110 MWh Since 100 MWh is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the electricity export rate are known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 CE production credit rate The CE production credit rate is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the CE production credit rate range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated CE production credit rate value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the CE production cre
175. equivalent full load hours for the process cooling load If the Detailed option for the process cooling load characteristics is selected the user has to enter the percentage of time the process is operating on a monthly basis in the Base case load characteristics section located at the bottom of this worksheet and the model calculates the equivalent full load hours for the process cooling load Typical values for equivalent full load hours for the process cooling load range from 2 000 to 8 500 hours for a process that is weather independent and operates 100 of the time and range from 200 to 2 000 hours for a process that is only operating part of the year CHP 51 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Space cooling demand The model calculates the annual space cooling demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster which is the amount of energy required to cool the space including base load cooling Process cooling demand The model calculates the annual process cooling demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster which is the amount of energy required for process cooling Total cooling demand The model calculates the annual total cooling demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the amount of energy required from the base case cooling system for space cooling including base load cooling and or for process cooling This value is copied automa
176. er selects the power system that will act as the base load system from the drop down list The model then recalculates the values in the Base load power system and Intermediate load power system sections and operating strategy table See the following figure Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load CHP 111 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Select operating strategy The user selects the operating strategy from the drop down list For Full power capacity output the model assumes that the system is operating at full capacity 100 of the time For Power load following the model assumes that the system is operating at a capacity to match the power load For Heating load following the model assumes that the system is operating at a capacity to match the heating load The values calculated for the selected operating strategy in the Equipment Selection worksheet are displayed in bold and are copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet See one of the following figures Full Power Capacity Output Power Load Following Heating Load Following CHP 112 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Cost Analysis As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software the Cost Analysis worksheet is used to help the user estimate costs and credits associated with the proposed case project These costs are addressed from the initial or investment co
177. eration emission factors are already known GHG emissions factors for electricity generation for some jurisdictions might be calculated on an aggregate basis to help simply the preparation of GHG calculations This simplified method for calculating the baseline for a project can reduce the time and costs associated with establishing the baseline for the project but in most cases will reduce the accuracy of the baseline calculations RETScreen includes electricity generation GHG emission factors for a number of countries As an alternative a more detailed standard analysis can be prepared For example for central grid electricity projects in North America it is often reasonable to assume that a combined cycle natural gas power plant is the baseline or proxy plant In this case the user needs only to select Natural gas as the fuel type with a 100 fuel mix and use the CHP 171 RETScreen Software Online User Manual default T amp D losses of 8 For the case of an isolated grid application a diesel genset would likely be the proxy power plant with Diesel 2 oil chosen as the fuel type For off grid applications the fuel type is defined in the Load amp Network worksheet It is also possible to define the grid and the mix of the different power plants with their respective fuels fuel mix and different T amp D losses e g distributed generators such as photovoltaics will have lower T amp D losses This information is usually
178. es for CDM Projects table Project financing The time and effort required to arrange project financing will vary depending upon the project developer and client relationship In most cases where the client is the building owner and the developer is the product supplier the project financing costs attributable to the project are minimal The building owner will usually finance the project out of capital or O amp M budgets and the product supplier will provide in kind support as required to help arrange the client project financing In the case of an ESCO independent power producer or local utility developed project much more effort will likely be required to arrange financing negotiate an energy services contract with the building owner purchase power agreement with the utility or other customers and prepare legal documents The cost of financing will be comprised of the effort required by experts to make the arrangements identify investors and solicit funds Typical rates for such work are set at a percentage of the financed amount and may include a fixed commencement fee The cost of project financing is calculated based on an estimate of the services required to secure both debt and equity commitments Acquiring the necessary project financing will involve between 3 and 100 person days at a rate of between 500 and 1 500 per person day depending on the complexity of the proposed financing structure As a rule of thumb the cost of acquiring
179. es for the project This value includes both equipment and installation costs As an example in Canada implementing heating related energy efficiency measures to reduce the base case heating system s total peak heating load by 20 to 30 typically costs 10 m to 35 m depending on the measures implemented CHP 131 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Cooling system The cooling system as defined here includes the base load peak load and back up cooling equipment It also includes the cooling distribution sys
180. es the cost of spare parts and annual labour required for routine and emergency maintenance and operation of the proposed project It also includes the transmission line and the district heating and or cooling network maintenance if this cost is covered by the project owner Operation includes monitoring regular inspection of the equipment including routine lubrication and adjustments snow ice and dirt removal scheduled maintenance internal inspection and maintenance etc The maintenance of transmission lines associated with a power project will involve periodic clearing of trees where present and replacement of parts e g poles conductor insulators that become damaged due to lightning impact etc The annual cost of transmission line maintenance is often estimated based on the capital cost of the transmission line and substation Annual costs normally range between 3 and 6 of capital costs depending on the location and communication equipment required i e ease of access presence of trees VHF radio network etc For CHP projects the cost for parts and labour is typically best expressed as a percentage of the total initial cost and represents around 5 of the initial costs It can also be expressed in terms of kWh of electricity generated and range between 0 005 kWh and 0 015 kWh depending on complexity and staffing requirements The parts and labour costs can sometimes be governed by local regulations stipulating high staffi
181. estic and international markets including projects that fall under the Kyoto Protocol s Clean Development Mechanism CDM and Joint Implementation JI The CHP 165 RETScreen Software Online User Manual online manual provides information and Website links related to the rules and guidelines that have been developed for CDM and JI projects in particular those regarding baselines and the transaction costs associated with these projects Based on user inputs RETScreen estimates the quantity of credits that the project may generate and includes the value of these credits in the financial analysis of the project One of the primary benefits of using the RETScreen software is that it facilitates the project evaluation process for decision makers The GHG Analysis worksheet with its emission related input items e g fuel mix and its calculated emission factor output items e g GHG emission factor allows the decision maker to consider various emission parameters with relative ease However the user should be aware that this ease of use may give a project developer a too optimistic and simplified view of what is required in setting a baseline for a proposed project As such it is suggested that the user take a conservative approach in calculating the baseline emission factor for the project particularly at the pre feasibility analysis stage In order to determine the net benefits of obtaining carbon finance for the project the user can e
182. example if Afghanistan is selected from the currency switch drop down list all project monetary data are expressed in AFA The first two letters of the country currency code refer to the name of the country AF for Afghanistan and the third letter to the name of the currency A for Afghani Name of unit Symbol for unit atmosphere atm O British thermal unit Poly y d Ek degree Fahrenheit o er hertz O Ei O E Pome wy k Pascal Pk person day Ooo d O o persom trip oip O person year p yr Ooo pound ST pound force per square inch absolate psia pound force per square inch gauge psig refrigerant tonne revolution per mimte mm Oooo o oled s Oooo i otom Tt _ _nited States gallon O ga ES it a i Symbol for prefix gt E _ pte TT pr lion O 1 The gallon gal unit used in RETScreen refers to US gallon and not to imperial gallon unless otherwise specified 2 The tonne t unit used in RETScreen refers to metric tonnes List of Units Symbols and Prefixes CHP 11 RETScreen Software Online User Manual For information purposes the user may want to assign a portion of a project cost item in a second currency to account for those costs that must be paid for in a currency other than the currency in which the project costs are reported To assign a cost item in a second currency the user must select the option Second currency from the Cost reference drop
183. f cooling will have a significant impact e g industrial process computer equipment etc For example a back up cooling system might be utilised in the case of a cooling system shutdown or during maintenance of the other systems System design graph The System design graph summarises essential design information for the user The stacked bar graph on the left shows the percentage of the installed capacity kW for each of the systems base load intermediate load 2 and peak load over the System peak load as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet The stacked bar graph can exceed 100 to allow the system to be oversized The stacked bar graph on the right shows the CHP 31 RETScreen Software Online User Manual percentage of energy delivered MWh by each system over the System energy demand as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet This stacked bar graph cannot exceed 100 Proposed case system summary This section summarises the fuel types used the estimated fuel consumption the installed capacity and the energy delivered for the different power heating and or cooling systems in order to meet the system peak load and energy demand as calculated in the Energy Model Load amp Network and Equipment Selection worksheets These values are copied automatically to the Cost Analysis GHG Analysis and or Financial Summary worksheets The user also selects by ticking the box which system or fuel might be able
184. f the actual emissions reductions the project has achieved and the quantification of Emissions Reduction Units ERUs For CDM projects emissions reductions must be verified and certified by a designated operational entity before Certified Emissions Reductions CERs are issued A prescribed rate of US 400 day has been set for the staff of designated operational entities or US 1 200 day for a team of three For CDM projects an administration and adaptation fee will be charged by the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNFCCC Some host countries may also require a percentage of the value of CERs to be paid as an administration fee note this percentage can be entered and accounted for on the GHG Analysis worksheet It may be decided to bundle and incur GHG monitoring and verification on a periodic e g every two years rather than on an annual basis especially for smaller projects In this case the user should use the Periodic Costs section at the bottom of the Cost Analysis worksheet to do so and set the same to 0 in the Annual O amp M Costs section Community benefits In order to ensure the acceptance of the proposed case project within a community it is common in large projects to reserve a small portion of the O amp M budget to fund an initiative that will benefit the community This could take the form of a donation to support a public awareness centre for the plant donations to charitable organisations a grant
185. f the isolated grid This value is used to evaluate if electricity can be exported to the grid by the proposed case power system Electricity can not be exported to the grid if the proposed case power system capacity exceeds the minimum load of the isolated grid Type The user enters the off grid power system type considered for reference purposes only CHP 60 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the base case power system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the base case power system Capacity The user enters the capacity of the base case power system for reference purposes only Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the base case power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quot
186. fficiency varies depending on the back pressure and the difference between the superheated and saturated temperature See one of the following figures Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat Actual steam rate ASR The model calculates the actual steam rate ASR for the steam turbine based on the steam flow maximum extraction turbine efficiency and the theoretical steam rates at the extraction port and back pressure port This value is the actual amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Summary This section summarises the power and heating capacities with and without extraction It also provides the electricity delivered to the load and exported to the grid depending on the operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Power capacity ST with extraction The model calculates the power capacity of the steam turbine ST with extraction CHP 91 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The percentage of the power capacity ST with extraction over the proposed case power system peak load is also calculated Total power capacity GTCC with extraction The model calculates the total power capacity with extraction for the gas turbine combined cycle GTCC power system by adding the gas turbine power capacity GT to the steam turbine
187. ficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year The heat rate for gas turbines varies also depending on the location i e altitude humidity and temperature See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 M Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambient Temperature Heat recovery efficiency The user enters the heat recovery efficiency of the heat recovery steam generator HRSG or heat recovery system for hot water If t
188. for sesers 185 Sensitivity and Risk Analysis 14 185 Sensitivity range eeeseeeeeeeeeeererrrerrererrererre 186 Settings 0 0 15 113 165 166 171 185 196 Show alternative units 0 0 0 0 12 16 68 Simple payback cccssesesesessesseeeenenenes 161 Simplified baseline methods possible 169 Simplified Standard or Custom analysis 166 Single fuel arnein ihia ta 76 Site amp building design eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 126 Site conditons henni iii 33 47 Site investigation eseeeeeeeeeeeeeerrrererrreeree 117 Site survey amp land rights 0 elects eeeeeeeee 123 Space cooling demand eee eeeeecseeeeeeeeees 52 Space heating demand cee ceeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 38 Spare Parts soiien ioie aA S 138 Specific project Costs 134 Steam flown eiris 75 88 93 99 Steam presSui Enar s 218 Steam temperature eee eee eee 100 218 Steam turbine eee 88 91 93 96 100 Steam turbine ST efficiency 91 96 100 Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure 0006 6 91 96 100 251 Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat 6 91 96 100 250 Steam Turbine Installed Cost Examples 6 129 258 Steam Turbine Schematic 0000 00 6 93 248 Storage equipment eect ceeeeeeteeneeeee 136 Substation cccccccessececsssceceesseeesssseeees 130 258 Suggested capacity oe 20 21 27
189. for moisture content range from 10 to 50 with freshly chipped wood ranging from 40 to 55 Fuels that have moisture content greater than 50 to 55 normally require drying before they can be used as a fuel Fuel consumption as fired The model calculates the as fired annual fuel consumption for the fuel type s selected Fuel rate as fired The model calculates the as fired fuel rate price per unit fuel for the fuel type s selected Heating value amp fuel rate This tool is used to convert the heating value and fuel rate into alternative units for the fuel selected by the user from the Fuel type drop down list Fuel type The user selects the fuel type from the drop down list Heating value The model displays the heating value for the fuel type selected A drop down list is also provided to allow the user to view the heating value in alternative units Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be displayed Fuel rate
190. fuel for the fuel types CHP 78 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel cost The model calculates the annual fuel cost for the fuel types by multiplying the fuel rate by the annual fuel consumption The total cost for the entire fuel mix is also calculated Proposed case power system In this section the user enters the information about the proposed case base load and or intermediate load power systems See one of the following figures Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load System selection The user selects if the proposed case power system includes a base load system or a combined base and intermediate load system When Base amp intermediate load system is selected the model assumes that the base load system operates at full power capacity output and that the amount of energy available from the base load system will be used before energy is supplied by the intermediate and or peak load systems The intermediate load power system then operates under the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section See one of the following figures Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load Base load power system Intermediate load power system Type The user selects the power system type considered from the drop down list Availa
191. fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight The amount of volatiles and fixed carbon directly affect the heating value of the fuel flame temperature and the process by which combustion is achieved The ash content is important in the design of air emission control equipment combustion system and ash handling system Typically the analysis includes hydrogen carbon oxygen nitrogen sulphur and ash The amount of sulphur in biomass fuels is typically very low or non existent Analytically derived formulae have been developed for the prediction of the higher heating value of coal and other fossil fuels Exact calculations are available for all components of biomass fuel which will oxidize However it is very difficult to quantify the contribution of volatiles to the heating value Carbon The user enters the amount of carbon C present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass carbon content typically ranges from 40 to 55 Hydrogen The user enters the amount of hydrogen H2 present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass hydrogen content typically ranges from 4 to 6 Oxygen The user enters the amount of oxygen O2 present in the fuel as a percentage of dry fuel weight This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Biomass oxygen content typically ranges from 33 to 43 CH
192. g eee eeeeeecseeeeeteenees 119 125 157 Enthalpy 0 0 eee 89 90 91 94 95 96 218 Enthalpy difference n se 218 Entropy rene aE E N 89 94 218 Environmental assessment ceseeeeeeeees 118 Equipment Selection 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 25 29 30 31 32 65 66 67 68 109 112 143 145 152 178 180 182 196 197 200 204 208 209 211 220 Hguity i s Stiisetet n E 147 162 186 Equity payback sssr 162 186 Equivalent degree days for DHW heating 34 Equivalent full load hours 34 37 48 51 Equivalent full load hours process cooling 51 Equivalent full load hours process heating 37 Estimated Substation Costs 7 130 258 Estimated Transmission Line Costs 6 129 258 Ethan beisen aa eaer e 201 Exchange tate pietei e 45 58 Extract Ot geresne ee aei 89 94 95 EXtraction portresi oesie 89 94 Extraction pressure n se 89 95 F Feasibility study sses 117 157 FIQUIES v2 22 cuiniesen Bentecii ride 4 224 260 Final year landfill used eect eeeeeeeeneeees 205 FINAN seenen arena s 146 Financial parameters 145 Financial Summary 14 32 38 39 52 53 145 152 154 156 163 164 165 166 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 193 208 Financial viability ee eeeeeeeeeenees 145 160 Fixed charge monthly eee 215 216 Foreign aMoumnt eeceeeceeneeeeeseeeeeees 115 116 Fuel 5 6 7 15 20 25 27 30 36
193. g and or power systems and locations including notes on any attributes or problems for conversion to a CHP plant selection of a possible site for the CHP plant preparation of a layout of approach roads and a plant yard for outdoor storage of fuel resource Site visit time includes the time required to arrange meetings survey the site obtain the necessary information and any travel time but not travel expenses see Travel amp accommodation Preliminary data gathering which should build upon the initial pre feasibility analysis data should be conducted prior to and during the site visit The time required for a site survey detailed building and site analysis varies according to the number of buildings involved and the complexity of the existing system Obtaining fuel consumption data can sometimes add to the time required The cost of a site visit is influenced by the planned duration and travel time to and from the site The time required to gather the data prior to the site visit and during the site visit typically falls between 1 and 5 person days The average per daily fees of the personnel making the visit s will range from 300 to 1 000 depending on their experience Resource assessment The user must carefully consider the energy resource to ensure that there is a sufficient local resource to meet the projects energy requirements in an environmentally appropriate and financially viable manner For example biomass projects are n
194. g pressure 74 88 93 99 Operating profit loss ee eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee 111 Operating strategy 18 19 79 80 81 83 91 92 97 98 101 102 104 105 106 107 108 109 178 Other 75 107 122 138 170 173 220 OXY SEN Shaanti dotnet a 198 202 P Parts amp labo r ponnner niaes 141 Peak load 18 20 23 27 29 30 60 64 66 70 216 217 Peak load annual 0 cccccseeeees 64 66 217 Peak load cooling system cee 29 30 70 Peak load heating system eee 23 27 Peak load power system eee eects 18 20 Peak process cooling load 00 eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 Peak process heating load ce eeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 Percent of LFG flared base case 04 210 Perform analysis On nsss 186 187 Periodic costs credits cccccceeeeesees 144 159 Permits amp approvals sesers 122 123 Photovoltaic module 106 Pipe SECHLONS ossea scontsie sett eis 42 55 PIPE SIZ lc ornet eea a ete eas 43 56 Potential CDM project 167 Power 4 6 8 14 15 17 18 60 62 65 79 80 83 85 91 92 97 100 101 103 105 106 107 111 112 122 128 151 157 213 214 217 224 225 226 227 228 249 253 259 Power capacity 80 83 85 91 92 97 100 101 103 105 106 107 213 Power capacity with extraction eee 97 Power capacity GT ce ceeecseeeceeeeeeteneeeees 85 Power capacity ST with extraction 91 Power capaci
195. g strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the CHP 102
196. g value units The model displays the fuel consumption unit Fuel consumption unit Energy units The user selects the fuel consumption unit Fuel rate unit The model displays the fuel rate unit CO emission factor The user enters the carbon dioxide CO2 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ CH emission factor The user enters the methane CH4 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ N20 emission factor The user enters the nitrous oxide NO emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ User defined fuel solid This tool is used to define the User defined fuel solid selected by the user from the Fuel type list in the Equipment Selection worksheet CHP 197 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Fuel type The user enters the name of the fuel for reference purposes only The user also selects between fossil fuel and biomass Proximate analysis A proximate analysis describes the volatiles fixed carbon and ash present in the
197. gas analysis since the same amount of CO emitted from the energy utilisation of biomass is used in new biomass growth CH emission factor The user enters the methane CH emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ N20 emission factor The user enters the nitrous oxide N20 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ Note At this point the user should return to the Equipment Selection worksheet User defined fuel gas This tool is used to define the User defined fuel gas selected by the user from the Fuel type list in the Equipment Selection worksheet CHP 200 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel type The user enters the name of the fuel for reference purposes only Temperature The user enters the gas reference temperature for the Volume entry method If Weight entry method is selected the gas reference temperature will be used to calculate the volume based percentages and the density of the gas at the reference temperature The user selects Volume or Weight entry method for the proximate analysis that follows Proximate analysis A proximate analysis for a
198. gaseous fuel typically includes methane ethane propane carbon monoxide carbon dioxide hydrogen sulphide hydrogen nitrogen and oxygen Methane The user enters the amount of methane CH4 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Ethane The user enters the amount of ethane C2H6 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Propane The user enters the amount of propane C3Hg present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Carbon monoxide The user enters the amount of carbon monoxide CO present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel CHP 201 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Carbon dioxide The user enters the amount of carbon dioxide CO2 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Hydrogen sulphide The user enters the amount of hydrogen sulphide H2S present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating va
199. gth and cost of the secondary distribution line pipe is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet Energy efficiency measures The user enters the total installed cost for any additional cooling related energy efficiency measures for the project This value includes both equipment and installation costs As an example in Canada implementing cooling related energy efficiency measures to reduce the base case cooling system s total peak cooling load by 10 to 20 typically costs 5 m to 15 m depending on the measures implemented Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in
200. h to use a new methodology they may submit it for approval Details of approved methodologies are provided at the UNFCCC s CDM Website Joint Implementation JI projects on the other hand occur in Annex 1 countries that is countries that have agreed to emissions targets under the Kyoto Protocol Like the CDM the basic concept of JI is that industrialised countries or companies invest in GHG emission reduction projects in other Annex 1 countries where reductions are cheaper than in their own country and gain credits from these projects that can then applied to their own GHG reduction commitments as agreed to under Kyoto In practice Joint Implementation projects are more likely to take place in Economies In Transition or EITs where there tends to be more scope for cutting emissions at lower costs Joint Implementation projects must have the approval of all Parties involved and must lead to emission reductions or removals that are additional to any that would have occurred without the project An ERU is an Emission Reduction Unit generated from a JI project An ERU is equal to one metric tonne of carbon dioxide CO equivalent Projects starting from the year 2000 that meet the above rules may be listed as Joint Implementation projects However ERUs may only be issued after 2008 Simplified baseline methods possible RETScreen automatically assesses by checking values calculated on other RETScreen worksheets whether or not the proje
201. he lower heating value of the fuel using Delong s formula Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Fuel consumption unit The user selects the fuel consumption unit Density The model calculates the density of the fuel at normal pressure 1 atm or 101 3 kPa and at the reference temperature entered above Fuel rate unit The model displays the fuel rate unit CO emission factor The user enters the carbon dioxide CO2 emission factor for the fuel It represents the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ Note that the model also calculates the CO emission factor based on the proximate analysis and this value is shown to the right of the entry cell However for biogas fuels it is reasonable to assume that this value will be equal to zero for the purpose of preparing a greenhouse gas analysis since the same amount of CO emitted from the energy utilisation of biomass is used in new biomass growth CH emission factor The user enters the methane
202. he power equipment temperature is too low only part of the heat produced can be recovered Typical values for heat recovery efficiency range from 50 to 80 For a low temperature heating load the higher value can be used and for high temperature heating load the lower value is more suitable If the heat recovery system is for hot water the heat recovery efficiency is typically higher than if it is for steam CHP 84 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the power capacity and heat rate Heating capacity The model calculates the heating capacity of the power equipment based on the power capacity the heat rate and the heat recovery efficiency The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Gas turbine combined cycle Gas turbine combined cycle GTCC power systems produce electricity for the power load using a gas turbine and a generator as well as a steam turbine and generator using heat recovered from the gas turbine s exhaust gas using a heat recovery steam generator HRSG Heat can be recovered from the steam turbine ST extraction port and back pressure port for the heating load
203. he process heating load characteristics is selected the user enters the equivalent full load hours for the process heating load If the Detailed option for the process heating load characteristics is selected the user has to enter the percentage CHP 37 RETScreen Software Online User Manual of time the process is operating on a monthly basis in the Base case load characteristics section located at the bottom of this worksheet and the model calculates the equivalent full load hours for the process heating load Typical values for equivalent full load hours for process heating load range from 2 000 to 8 500 hours for a process that is weather independent and operates 100 of the time and 200 to 2 000 hours for a process that is only operating part of the year Space heating demand The model calculates the annual space heating demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster which is the amount of energy required to heat the space including domestic hot water Process heating demand The model calculates the annual process heating demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster which is the amount of energy required for process heating Total heating demand The model calculates the annual total heating demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the amount of energy required from the base case heating system for space heating including domestic hot w
204. he proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only CHP 75 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the heating system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for heating systems range from 50 for a standard boiler or furnace with pilot light to 350 for a ground source heat pump Typical values of heating system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems table The first 3 listed are based on HHV natural gas fuel Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the capacity and seasonal efficiency Fuel selection method The user selects the fuel selection method from the drop down list Single fuel Selecting Single fuel allows the
205. heat rate and the heat recovery efficiency The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Gas turbine Gas turbines produce electricity for the power load using a generator In addition to producing electricity useful heat can be recovered from the exhaust gas using a heat recovery steam generator HRSG or heat recovery system for hot water and this recovered waste heat can be provided to a heating load Refer to the Gas Turbine Schematic for more information CHP 82 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net
206. her or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the peak load power system CHP 20 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Suggested capacity The model calculates the suggested capacity of the peak load power system This value is calculated by subtracting the base load power system capacity and the intermediate load power system capacity if included from the proposed case power system peak load calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet Note that if the Availability of the base load and or intermediate load power systems are less than 100 or 8 760 hours then the capacity of these power systems will be added to the suggested capacity for the peak load power system Capacity The user enters the capacity of the peak load power system If the capacity entered is below the model s suggested capacity of the peak load power system then it is assumed that the system cannot meet the peak power load at design conditions and the calculations made by the model will not be accurate The System design graph can be used as a guide The percentage of the peak load power system capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Electricit
207. ht have to be subtracted as a transaction fee to be paid each year to the crediting agency e g the UNFCCC and or the host country For CDM projects 2 of the CERs generated by each project will be paid into an Adaptation fund to help particularly vulnerable developing countries adapt to climate change Note that projects in least developed countries are exempt from this part of the levy in order to promote the equitable distribution of projects The CDM Executive Board as well as a number of host countries also require that they receive a percentage of the credits to help cover their administrative costs e g for project approval etc The user might wish to check the UNFCCC s CDM Website and with the host country s Designated National Authority to find out if they require a percentage of credits to be paid gt A list of Designated National Authorities is available at the UNFCCC s CDM Website CHP 183 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The model then reduces the gross annual GHG emission reductions by this percentage to calculate the net annual GHG emission reduction Net annual GHG emission reduction The model calculates the net annual reduction in GHG emissions estimated to occur if the proposed project is implemented The calculation is based on the gross annual GHG emission reduction and the GHG credits transaction fee Units are given in equivalent tonnes of CO emissions per year tco2 yr The model
208. ick here to calculate risk analysis button will reappear and the impact graph the distribution graph and the bar graph will be crossed out showing that the risk analysis calculations have to be updated Median The model calculates the median of the financial indicator The median of the financial indicator is the 50 percentile of the 500 values generated by the Monte Carlo simulation The median will normally be close to the financial indicator value calculated in the Financial Summary worksheet Level of risk The user enters the acceptable level of risk for the financial indicator under consideration The level of risk input is used to establish a confidence interval defined by maximum and minimum limits within which the financial indicator is expected to fall The level of risk represents the probability that the financial indicator will fall outside this confidence interval The limits of the confidence interval are automatically calculated based on the median and the level of risk and are shown as Minimum within level of confidence and Maximum within level of confidence It is suggested that the user enter a level of risk of 5 or 10 which are typical values for standard risk analysis CHP 193 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Minimum within level of confidence The model calculates the Minimum within level of confidence which is the lower limit of the confidence interval within which the financial indic
209. ied latitude and longitude The user may simply copy and paste this data to the RETScreen spreadsheets or manually enter these values NASA and CETC Varennes are co operating to facilitate the use of NASA s global satellite solar data with RETScreen and to develop a new global weather database see Surface meteorology and Solar Energy Data Set for the tool This work is sponsored as part of NASA s Earth Science Enterprise Program and is being carried out at the NASA Langley Research Center and at CETC Varennes This collaboration provides RETScreen users access free of charge to satellite data e g the amount of solar energy striking the surface of the earth global temperatures and wind speeds simply by clicking on links in either the RETScreen software or the NASA Website These data had previously only been available from a limited number of ground monitoring stations and are critical for assessing the amount of energy a project is expected to produce The use of these data results in substantial cost savings for users and increased market opportunities for industry while allowing governments and industry to evaluate regional energy resource potential CHP 222 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Cost Data Typical cost data required to prepare RETScreen studies are provided in the RETScreen Online Cost Database and in the Online Manual This database is built into the right hand column of the Cost Analysis
210. ing system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for heating systems range from 50 for a standard boiler or furnace with pilot light to 350 for a ground source heat pump Typical values of heating system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems table The first 3 listed are based on HHV natural gas fuel Boiler type The user selects the boiler type considered from the drop down list Operating pressure The user enters the operating pressure of the steam boiler Saturation temperature The model calculates the steam saturation temperature The saturation temperature is the boiling point at the selected steam operating pressure Superheated temperature The user enters the superheated temperature of the steam If superheated steam is not required the user enters the saturation temperature calculated by the model Superheated steam is defined as steam heated to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature while maintaining the saturation pressure It cannot exist in contact with water nor contain water and resembles a perfect gas Superheated steam might be called surcharged s
211. ion line pipe cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built in formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc CHP 44 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Exchange rate The user enters the exchange rate to convert the calculated Canadian dollar costs into the currency in which the project costs are reported as selected at the top of the Energy Model worksheet The rate entered must be the value of one Canadian dollar expressed in the currency in which the project costs are reported Energy transfer station s cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the model calculates the energy transfer station s cost for all the buildings in each cluster using the Typical Costs for Indirect Heating Energy Transfer Station s graph The cost for a direct connected energy transfer station is calculated to be 75 of the cost of an indirect energy transfer station If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the energy transfer station s cost per building cluster The model then calculates the total costs for all building clusters The costs shown for the energy transfer station include supply and installation in a new building If the building needs to be converted from steam or electric baseboard heating the costs are substantially higher and should be confirmed by a local contractor It should be noted that building owners sometimes
212. is value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for heating systems range from 50 for a standard boiler or furnace with pilot light to 350 for a ground source heat pump Typical values of heating system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems table The first 3 listed are based on HHV natural gas fuel Back up heating system optional The back up heating system is designed to meet the heating demand in case of failure by the base load intermediate load intermediate load 2 and or peak load heating systems This is an optional equipment and its use will depend on how critical the heating loads are and whether or not the peak load heating system is sufficient to provide all the back up heating Type The user enters optional back up heating system type considered if required CHP 28 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Capacity The user enters the capacity of the optional back up heating system Back up heating system might be part of a system A common rule of thumb is that each heating plant should have back up capability equal to the largest system For example a back
213. item typically represents the sum of the purchase and installation costs of the power equipment less any credits for not having to purchase or install base case equipment Heating system The heating system item typically represents the sum of the purchase and installation costs of the heating equipment less any credits for not having to purchase or install base case equipment Cooling system The cooling system item typically represents the sum of the purchase and installation costs of the cooling equipment less any credits for not having to purchase or install base case equipment CHP 157 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Balance of system amp miscellaneous The balance of system amp miscellaneous item represents the sum of the purchase construction and installation costs of all the elements of the energy system other than the equipment costs less any credits for not having to purchase or install base case equipment It also includes all the costs not considered in any of the other initial costs categories that are required to bring a project to the operational stage Incentives and grants The financial incentive entered by the user in the financial parameters section is transferred here This is any contribution grant subsidy etc that is paid for the initial cost excluding credits of the project In the model the incentive is deemed not to be refundable and is treated as income during the developmen
214. ith the training of equipment operators and maintenance personnel will depend on the size complexity and remoteness of the project For isolated areas there will be a greater need for local trained technicians in order to avoid lengthy repair delays For a CHP plant a crew of about 20 persons may be required to operate the plant For small packaged gas turbines micro turbines one operator maintenance technician can perform regular operation and maintenance tasks However some of the periodic repairs will require specialised labour Training costs include professional fees Any travel expenses can be entered in Travel amp accommodation under the Development section Training will involve between 2 and 10 people for 1 to 20 days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 per person day depending on the size of the project Commissioning is the last activity of the construction phase It consists of operating all the equipment to detect and fix any malfunctions and ensure that the plant function as guaranteed Commissioning normally involves the monitoring of the equipment performance over a set period of time under typical operating conditions The cost associated with the commissioning of the CHP project will depend on the technology size and number of systems and on the skills and experience of the O amp M staff It could also depend on the climatic conditions to the extent that a sustained period of peak heating and or cooling load is require
215. ity study team These expenses include such things as airfare car rental lodging and per diem rates for each trip required In the case of isolated areas rates for air travel will vary markedly Airfares are typically twice those for similar distances in populated areas Since travel is a large component of the cost of doing work in isolated areas and the range of cost so variable it is advised to contact a travel agent with experience in arranging such travel Accommodation rates are typically twice the going rate for modest accommodation in populated areas Typical rates for modest hotel rooms can range from 180 to 250 per day in the more isolated areas Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The
216. kWh the fuel consumption in kWh is multiplied by 3 412 Btu kWh Accuracy of Project Cost Estimates Range of accuracy of estimates equal to estimated cost divided by final L cost assuming constant currency value 1 5 Pre tender estimate 14 cost accuracy within 10 1 3 a All tenders received fe eae cost accuracy within 5 L1 Final cost N 1 0 0 9 4 Construction 0 8 or Y Feasibility study 7 cost accuracy within 15 to 25 os O 4 0 5 t Pre feasibility study cost accuracy within 40 to 50 Time gt CHP 255 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Reciprocating Engine Installed Cost Examples Z a 4 tf a le t ae E U e N ad om Ra go gt U So g ao gt z kaa 3 V lt gt b A T ov 5 a 7 ed 0 Power capacity kW Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples lt 5MW Cost per installed capacity kW Power capacity kW CHP 256 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 5 to 50MW Cost per installed capacity kW 10 000 15 000 20 000 5 000 10 000 35 000 40 000 45 000 0 000 Power capacity kW Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 50 to 300MW ve Cost per installed capacity kW ve 0 000 00 000 150 000 300 000 Power capacity kW CHP 257 RETScreen Software
217. l 1 450 652 4621 Fax 1 450 652 5177 E mail rets nrcan gc ca Minister of Natural Resources Canada 1997 2005 RETSCREEN is a registered trademark of the Minister of Natural Resources Canada CHP 266 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model License agreement The use of RETScreen International is subject to the terms detailed in the RETScreen Software License Agreement which is available at the following Website address www retscreen net license html The user is encouraged to properly register at the RETScreen Website so that the Centre may periodically inform the user of product upgrades and be able to report on the global use of RETScreen CHP 267 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Bibliography Avallone E A and Baumeister T II Marks Standard Handbook for Mechanical Engineers McGraw Hill Inc 1987 American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals Volume 1997 Arkay K and Blais C The District Energy Option in Canada CANMET Energy Technology Centre Ottawa Natural Resources Canada 1996 Beaty H W and Fink D G Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers 14 edition McGraw Hill Inc 2000 Church K Community Energy Planning A Guide for Communities CANMET Energy Technology Centre Ottawa Natural Resources Canada 2003 Ciavaglia L Personal communication CANMET Energy Tech
218. l once filling operations have been completed Horizontal LFG collection trenches are typically used to collect gas while the site is still active The costs to install vertical wells can vary dramatically as a function of local costs for materials such as aggregate pipe and grout contractor availability available equipment types and capacities and the specific characteristics of the well design The World Bank 2004 As an example for 100 to 150 mm diameter wells typical costs for vertical wells range from 225 vertical metre to 375 vertical metre for depths below 15 m and from 300 vertical metre to 525 vertical metre for depths between 15 and 30 m For 900 mm diameter wells typical costs are greater than 750 vertical metre and are not normally considered to be cost effective LFG collection piping The user enters the cost for the landfill gas LFG collection piping This includes small diameter minimum 100 mm short laterals connecting the wells trenches subheaders which connect the laterals and headers connecting the subheaders to the extraction plant The relative costs of the piping systems to collect and transport the LFG to the facility can vary substantively based on site specific conditions and the applicable design basis CHP 134 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The costs for small diameter above ground piping can be less than 45 metre but larger diameter buried piping can cost up to and
219. l peak heating load Fuel consumption unit Fuel consumption annual Fuel rate unit Fuel rate Fuel cost Proposed case energy efficiency measures End use energy efficiency measures Net peak heating load Net heating demand Building clusters 28 655 SMWh SAL SIL sikh SAL osoo osoo o150 0180 11000 6212 15 974 19 132 5 158 6 264 0 0 0 0 31 5 81 0 1 65 0 150 0 72 148 342 CHP 239 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Base Case Cooling System Cooling project Site conditions Estimate Nearest location for weather data Notes Range See Weather Database Monthly inputs Cooling design temperature Annual cooling degree days above 10 C Non weather dependant cooling Equivalent full load hours 10 to 47 C Complete Monthly inputs 5 to 30 Month January February March April Base case cooling system lv See technical note on cooling network design Cooled floor area per building cluster Number of buildings in building cluster Fuel type building Seasonal efficiency Cooling load calculation Cooling load for building cluster Total cooling demand Total peak cooling load Fuel consumption unit Fuel consumption annual Fuel rate unit Fuel rate Fuel cost Proposed case energy efficiency measures End use energy efficiency measures Proposed case district heating netwo
220. l product or person Neither Canada nor its ministers officers employees or agents makes any warranty in respect to this report or assumes any liability arising out of this report ISBN 0 662 40895 0 Catalogue no M39 121 2005E PDF Minister of Natural Resources Canada 1997 2005 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model TABLE OF CONTENTS Brief Description amp Model Flow Chart csssccssssscssssccssssccssscscsssccssssssssssssssssssseees D Combined Heat amp Power Project Model ssccssssccsssssssssscssssccssssscsssscsssssssssssceses L4 Biber oy WEOGGN sss cctdacniselcvcadscsosiesscdveddoccddcaistdasicdestevdeivtiesticesdtadedivts ddacteadesetisssscssddcatetee DO Load amp Network Design seessccescocssocssscessocesocesooessocessccesocesocesoocesoesssecesocssooessosessessseees JJ Equipment Selection seesseessocssooesoocssocessecssocesocesoosssscesoccesocesocssoosessesssecssocesoosssossssessssess OO Cost AHAlySIS ssscsissosbsosiseecsdcossstorseroerssssses teesi res anisses b asse reet toos ostensis oosit eeestis senises LO Financial S MMAi Y sca csisccsecedinesscenidvsccteiucacecacnasvencapensesisenseeaedacpessossnossavece pegacnesecgaescons EAO Greenhouse Gas GHG Emission Reduction Amallysis sccssccssssscssssscssssccssssrees 165 Sensitivity and Risk Analysis ccscccssssssssssscsssccssssccsssscsssecscssessssssccsssssssssescssssrees LOD TOOLS docs ccdssvedsseddecs
221. l the sensitivity variations are evaluated at the level of that worksheet Perform analysis on The user selects from four options in the drop down list the financial indicator to be used for the sensitivity analysis Modifying the selection in this cell will change the results in the worksheet Sensitivity range The user enters the sensitivity range which defines the maximum percentage variation that will be applied to all the key parameters in the sensitivity analysis results tables Each parameter is varied by the following fraction of the sensitivity range 1 1 2 0 1 2 1 Threshold The user enters the threshold value for the financial indicator selected The threshold is the value under which for the After tax IRR equity After tax IRR assets and Net Present Value NPV or over which for Equity payback the user considers that the proposed project is not financially viable Results which indicate an unviable project as defined by the user threshold will appear as orange cells in the sensitivity analysis results tables Risk analysis for This section allows the user to perform a risk analysis by specifying the uncertainty associated with a number of key input parameters and to evaluate the impact of this uncertainty on after tax IRR equity after tax IRR assets equity payback or Net Present Value NPV The risk analysis is performed using a Monte Carlo simulation that includes 500 possible combi
222. ld take any value between 18 and 22 Since 20 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the debt interest rate is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Debt term The debt term is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet CHP 191 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The user enters the debt term range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated debt term value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range specified by the user must be a percentage value between 0 and the lowest percentage such that the debt term will always fall between 1 year and the project life The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the debt term could take For example a range of 10 for a debt term of 20 years means that the debt term could take any value between 18 and 22 years Since 20 years is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the debt term is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Click here to calculate risk analy
223. le of heat energy generated kg GJ In the absence of project specific data a value of 0 0009 for HHV and 0 0010 for LHV provides a reasonable first estimate Note At this point the user should return to the Equipment Selection worksheet As fired fuel This tool is used to convert the fuel consumption and fuel rate values for the fuels selected by the user from the Fuel type drop down list in the Energy Model Load amp Network Equipment Selection and or GHG Analysis worksheets from a dry basis to as fired values Fuel type The user selects the fuel type s from the Fuel type drop down lists in the Energy Model Load amp Network Equipment Selection and or GHG Analysis worksheets and the fuel type s is copied automatically to the Tools worksheet Fuel consumption unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel type s selected Fuel consumption The model displays the annual fuel consumption for the fuel type s selected The fuel consumption is on a dry basis i e excluding moisture Fuel rate The model displays the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the fuel type s selected The fuel rate is on a dry basis i e excluding moisture Fuel cost The model displays the annual fuel cost for the fuel type s selected CHP 211 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Moisture content wet basis The user enters the of moisture on wet basis for the fuel type s For wood typical values
224. lectricity rate for the base case power system Note that this does not include the installed cost of equipment etc Those costs would be treated as Credits in the Cost Analysis worksheet if the proposed case power system is able to completely displace the need for the base case power system Total electricity cost The model calculates the total electricity cost based on the electricity demand and the electricity rate for the base case power system Base case load characteristics This section summarises the monthly loads and the annual peak load for the base case power cooling and or heating systems Power gross average load The user enters the gross monthly average power load for the base case power system If the base case system includes heating and or cooling with electricity the electricity required for heating and or cooling should be included in the power gross average load on a monthly basis A Check value warning will appear if the value is too low i e the Power net average load should be equal or greater than zero This can occur when electricity is used for heating and or cooling in the base case as these loads are broken out separately Note This column is only visible if the proposed project includes power Power net average load The model calculates the net monthly average power load for the base case power system by subtracting the electricity used for heating and or cooling from the power gross average l
225. les tax to the cost of the project chosen from the proposed range of values CHP 156 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Feasibility study The feasibility study item represents the sum of the costs incurred to assess the feasibility of a project It is net of any credits for not having to develop the base case project Considerable detail is provided in the Cost Analysis worksheet for estimating the sub costs for feasibility studies This is done because it will help the project proponent better estimate the costs of the next investment required which is the investment in a feasibility study However for smaller projects a RETScreen pre feasibility analysis may be sufficient to move to the development and engineering phase or to construction Note The RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software can also be used to help prepare the Feasibility Study as well Development The development item typically represents the sum of the costs incurred to bring a project to the detailed design and construction stage once its feasibility has been proven It is net of any credits for not having to develop the base case project Engineering The engineering item typically represents the sum of the costs of the design activities required to go from the development stage to the construction stage of a project It is net of any credits for not having to develop the base case project Power system The power system
226. letter size paper with a print quality of 600 dpi If the printer being used has a different dpi rating then the user must change the print quality dpi rating by selecting File Page Setup Page and Print Quality and then selecting the proper dpi rating for the printer Otherwise the user may experience quality problems with the printed worksheets CHP 13 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The RETScreen International Combined Heat amp Power CHP Project Model can be used world wide to easily evaluate the energy production life cycle costs and greenhouse gas emissions reduction for combined heat amp power projects It can be used to evaluate any one or combination of the following applications power heating cooling single buildings or multiple buildings industrial processes communities district heating and district cooling Further it permits analysis with a wide range of renewable and non renewable fuels which can be used in parallel including landfill gas biomass bagasse biodiesel hydrogen natural gas oil diesel coal municipal waste etc Finally these fuels can be evaluated using multiple types of power heating and or cooling equipment including reciprocating engines gas turbines gas turbine combined cycle steam turbines geothermal systems fuel cells wind turbines hydro turbines photovoltaic modules boilers heat pumps biomass systems heaters furnace
227. lly comprised of methane and carbon dioxide approximately 50 percent each by volume with trace quantities of other compounds Methane is the primary component of landfill gas that contributes to the gas s heating value The heating value of methane is typically defined on a volume basis There are numerous models available for estimating rates of landfill gas generation however accepted industry standard models are generally first order kinetic models that rely on a number of basic assumptions These models are used to predict the variation of landfill gas generation rates with time for a typical unit mass of solid waste This generation rate curve is then applied to records or projections of solid waste filling at a site to produce an estimate of the site s landfill gas generation over time RETScreen uses the Scholl Canyon Model This model with defined default parameters is the empirical first order decay model most widely accepted and used by industry and regulatory agencies including Environment Canada and the United States Environmental Protection Agency USEPA There are many more detailed models available for the estimation of landfill gas generation rates however these models require more specific knowledge of the waste quantities waste composition and land filling practices associated with the site than is normally available especially for older landfill sites where such records were not required The Scholl Canyon Model is based
228. load based on the fuel rate entered in the fuel selection method section above Electricity export rate The user enters the electricity export rate which is the rate paid by the electric utility or another customer If there is no electricity exported to the grid then the user does not have to enter this value or can simply enter a value of 0 Electricity rate proposed case The user enters the electricity rate for the proposed case system which represents the rate paid for electricity delivered by the utility after the implementation of the proposed project The electricity rate might increase after the implementation of the proposed project since utilities will often give lower rates to large users who have higher electricity demand Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load for the different operating strategies Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid or to another customer for the different operating strategies Remaining electricity required The model calculates the remaining electricity required for the different operating strategies This value represents the electricity that has to be provided by the peak load power system which can include grid electricity as defined in the Energy Model worksheet Heat recovered The model calculates the heat recovered from the power system for the heating load for the different oper
229. ls it might include dryers or cleaning equipment for the gas Storage equipment The user enters the cost of the fuel storage equipment For gas and liquid fuels it can include storage tanks Solid fuels can be stored outdoors or indoors The cost can include structures with or without moving floors cranes etc The storage bin can also have discharge and mixing systems CHP 136 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Distribution equipment The user enters the cost of the fuel distribution equipment For gas and liquid fuels it can include pumps compressors pressure reducing systems pipes etc For solid fuels it includes different conveyer systems such as chains augers bucket elevators and blow systems For solid fuels it is also common to have smaller fuel storage close to the combustion equipment surge or metering bins Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user
230. lue of the fuel Hydrogen The user enters the amount of hydrogen H2 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Nitrogen The user enters the amount of nitrogen N2 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Oxygen The user enters the amount of oxygen O2 present in the fuel as a percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected This is used to calculate the heating value of the fuel Total The model calculates the total percentage of volume or weight depending on entry method selected of the fuel evaluated The user should verify that this value equals 100 Higher heating value HHV The model calculates the higher heating value of the fuel using Delong s formula Heating value is a measure of energy released when a fuel is completely burned Depending on the composition of the fuel amount of hydrogen the amount of steam in the combustion products varies Higher heating value HHV is calculated assuming the CHP 202 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model combustion product is condensed and the steam is converted to water Lower heating value LHV is calculated assuming the combustion product stays in a vapour form Lower heating value LHV The model calculates t
231. m Note When the user enters 0 or leaves the cooled floor area per building zone cell blank the remaining cells of the column in this section are hidden For process cooling only this value is entered for reference purposes only but it has to be entered for each building zone considered in order to enter inputs in the remaining cells of the column CHP 49 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Cooled floor area per building cluster The user enters the total cooled floor space per building cluster A building cluster is any number of similar buildings connected to a single point of the distribution system The user obtains this value for each of the buildings included in the cooling system and summarises the values to enter the cluster total cooled floor area see Technical note on cooling network design Note When the user enters 0 or leaves the cooled floor area per building cluster cell blank the remaining cells of the column in this section are hidden For process cooling only this value is entered for reference purposes only but it has to be entered for each building cluster considered in order to enter inputs in the remaining cells of the column Number of buildings in building cluster The user enters the number of buildings in each building cluster Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the base case cooling system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at
232. millibar meter CHP 56 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The maximum velocity in larger pipes is maximised to 3 m s Before construction it is necessary to verify that the selected pipe system will be able to withstand all relevant actions and fulfil the safety and functional requirements during its entire service life The final pipe size needs to be verified using detailed calculations including pipe length and factor in the number of valves connection points elbows etc District cooling network cost Total pipe length The model calculates the total pipe length as the sum of the total pipe length for the main cooling distribution line and the total length of pipe section for the secondary cooling distribution lines Costing method The user selects the type of costing method from the drop down list If the Formula costing method is selected the model calculates the costs according to built in formulas If the Detailed costing method is selected the user enters the Energy Transfer Station ETS and secondary distribution pipes costs per building cluster and the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories The costs calculated by the Formula costing method are based on typical Canadian project costs as of January 2005 The user can adjust these costs to local conditions using the cost factors and the exchange rate in the cells below Energy transfer station s connection type The user
233. munity System Building Cluster Layout sesssecesooesoocssscessccesocssocessocessesssecssooee 239 Base Case Heating SystemM sssescssccsessseesscoccocecoosccoesooeesococcocscossecoessocesssoccosscsossssesssse 239 Base Case Cooling System cwiccicsiccressecacceciccceeincceatensatoseesnseseersoceanveertn nen enceanas 240 Proposed Case District Heating Network ccsscccsssscsssscssssccssssccssssscsssscssssssssssees 240 Proposed Case District Cooling Network ccssccssssccssssccsssscsssssscssscsssscscssssssseesees 240 Community System Base Case Heating System and Heating Load scsseees 241 Community System Base Case Cooling System and Cooling Load c0sse0e 241 Typical District Heating Supply and Return Temperatures ccssccssssccsssseees 242 Typical District Cooling Supply and Return Temper atures scccssccsessceseseees 242 Typical Costs for Indirect Heating Energy Transfer Station s ccsssccsssseees 243 Typical Costs for Indirect Cooling Energy Transfer Station s sccssssccsssseees 243 Typical Costs for Heating Distribution Line Pipes sccsssccsssscsssccssssccessssees 244 Typical Costs for Cooling Distribution Line Pipes ccssccssscccsssscssssccssscssseesees 244 Compressor Cooling System Schematic ccssccsssscssssscssssccssssscssssccssssssssssscsssssees 245 Absorption Cooling System Schematic ccsscccss
234. n are for the supply and installation of the supply and return pipes i e 2 pipes per meter of trench The cost per meter is for two pre insulated district heating type pipes in a trench approximately 600 mm deep It also includes the cost for the replacement of existing sidewalks Rocky terrain or installations in areas that have many old utility services e g telephone electricity sewage water etc could increase the calculated cost substantially Typical main distribution line pipe costs can be broken down as follows 45 for material 45 for installation and 10 for associated distribution pump system Total district cooling network cost The model calculates the total district cooling network cost which includes the total cost of secondary and main distribution pipes and the total cost of the energy transfer station s Power project Base case power system In this section the user provides information about the base case power system The user enters the power gross average load on a monthly basis and in the case of central grid and isolated grid systems the electricity rate for the base case power system in the Base case load characteristics section Grid type The user selects the grid type for the base case power system from the drop down list Peak load isolated grid The user enters the peak load of the isolated grid for reference purposes only Minimum load isolated grid The user enters the minimum load o
235. n formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc Exchange rate The user enters the exchange rate to convert the calculated Canadian dollar costs into the currency in which the project costs are reported as selected at the top of the Energy Model worksheet The rate entered must be the value of one Canadian dollar expressed in the currency in which the project costs are reported Energy transfer station s cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the model calculates the energy transfer station s cost for all the buildings in each cluster using the Typical Costs for Indirect Cooling Energy Transfer Station s graph The cost for a direct connected energy transfer station is calculated to be 75 of the cost of an indirect energy transfer station If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the energy transfer station s cost per building cluster The model then calculates the total costs for all building clusters The costs shown for the energy transfer station s include supply and installation in a new building It should be noted that building owners sometimes choose to remove existing chillers to gain valuable floor space Each energy transfer station consists of prefabricated heat exchanger unit The energy transfer station is provided with the necessary control equipment as well as all the internal piping The energy transfer station is designed for ease of con
236. nalysis These credits can have a significant impact on the financial viability of the proposed case system Settings Pre feasibility or Feasibility analysis The user selects the type of analysis by clicking on the appropriate radio button For a Pre feasibility analysis less detailed and lower accuracy information is typically required while for a Feasibility analysis more detailed and higher accuracy information is usually required To put this in context when funding and financing organisations are presented with a request to fund an energy project some of the first questions they will likely ask are how accurate is the estimate what are the possibilities for cost over runs and how does it compare financially with other options These are very difficult to answer with any degree of confidence since whoever prepared the estimate would have been faced with A reminder to the user that the typical values for cost items mentioned in the manual are for a 2005 baseline year in Canadian dollars Some of this data may be time sensitive so the user should verify current values where appropriate The approximate exchange rate from Canadian dollars to United States dollars was 1 CAD 0 81 USD and to the Euro was 1 CAD 0 62 EUR as of January 1 2005 CHP 113 RETScreen Software Online User Manual two conflicting requirements e Keep the project development costs low in case funding cannot be secured or in case the projec
237. nations of input variables resulting in 500 values of after tax IRR equity after tax IRR assets equity payback or Net Present Value NPV The risk analysis allows the user to assess if the variability of the financial indicator is acceptable or not by looking at the distribution of the possible outcomes An unacceptable variability will be an indication of a need to put more effort into reducing the uncertainty associated with the input parameters that were identified as having the greatest impact on the financial indicator CHP 186 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Perform analysis on The user selects from four options in the drop down list the financial indicator to be used for the risk analysis Modifying the selection in this cell will change the results in the bottom part of the worksheet Initial costs The total initial cost is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the initial costs range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated initial costs value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the initial costs could take For example a range of 10 for initial costs of 30 000 000 means that the initial costs could take any value between 27 000 000 and 33 000 000 Since 30 000 000 is the estima
238. nection to the building s internal cooling system Typically each building includes an energy meter These meters record district cooling water flow through the energy transfer station By measuring the temperature difference of incoming and return water temperature the energy usage is calculated Prefabricated energy transfer stations with heat exchanger unit are available for smaller buildings They consist of brazed plate or shell and tube heat exchangers for a circulation pump an expansion tank self actuating control valves and an energy meter CHP 58 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model For larger buildings the energy transfer station will be site assembled but will consist of the equipment with the same functions as for smaller buildings Secondary distribution line pipe cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the secondary distribution line pipe costs for all pipes connecting each cluster to the main distribution pipe are calculated by the model using the Typical Costs for Cooling Distribution Line Pipes graph If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the secondary distribution pipes cost per building cluster The model then calculates the total costs for all building clusters The costs shown are for the supply and installation of the supply and return pipes i e 2 pipes per meter of trench The cost per meter is for two pre insulated district heating type
239. net GHG reduction per year averaged over the project life For projects with a net increase in GHG emission the GHG reduction cost is irrelevant and hence not calculated In order to calculate the true economic not financial cost of GHG reductions a number of other parameters such as the GHG credits transaction fee GHG reduction credit rate debt ratio etc should be set to 0 In addition Income tax analysis should not be selected and other taxes should also be set to 0 Yearly cash flows Pre tax The model calculates the net pre tax cash flows which are the yearly net flows of cash for the project before income tax It represents the estimated sum of cash that will be paid or received each year during the entire life of the project Note that the equity is assumed to occur at the end of year O and that year 1 is the first year of operation of the project Annual costs and savings income given in the Financial Summary worksheet which reflect amounts valid for year 0 are thus escalated one year in order to determine the actual costs and savings income incurred during the first year of operation i e year 1 After tax The model calculates the net after tax cash flows which are the yearly net flows of cash for the project after income tax It represents the estimated sum of cash that will be paid CHP 163 RETScreen Software Online User Manual or received each year during the entire life of the project Note that the equi
240. newable Energy GEF Climate Change Projects and Impacts October 1999 Pre Publication Draft Global Environment Facility 1999 McCallum B Small Scale Automated Biomass Energy Heating Systems A Viable Option For Remote Canadian Communities Canadian Forest Service Great Lake Forestry Centre and CANMET Energy Technology Centre Varennes Natural Resources Canada 1997 McCallum B Case Studies of Small Commercial Biomass Combustion Systems in PEI Natural Resources Canada 1995 Randlgv P District Heating Handbook European District Heating Pipe Manufacturers Association ISBN87 90488 00 8 1997 Sandor R Walsh M and Leblanc A Creating a Market for Carbon Emissions Gas Industry Opportunities published in Natural Gas June 1999 Sykes B Personal Communication Canadian Forest Service Natural Resources Canada 1997 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNFCCC Clean Development Mechanism CDM Executive Board Annex B Indicative simplified baseline and monitoring methodologies for selected small scale CDM project activity categories December 2002 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNFCCC National Communications 2004 The World Bank Energy Sector Management Assistance Programme Handbook for the Preparation of Landfill Gas to Energy Projects in Latin America and the Caribbean January 2004 CHP 269 RETScreen Software Online User Manual
241. ney nor the impact of inflation on the costs On the other hand the payback period is often of great importance to individuals or small firms that may be cash poor When a firm is cash poor a project with a short payback period but a low rate of return might be preferred over another project with a high rate of return but a long payback period The reason is that the organisation might simply CHP 161 RETScreen Software Online User Manual need a faster repayment of its cash investment The model uses the total initial costs the total annual costs excluding debt payments and the total annual savings and income to calculate the simple payback The calculation is based on pre tax amounts and includes any initial cost incentives and grants Equity payback The model calculates the equity payback which represents the length of time that it takes for the owner of a project to recoup its own initial investment equity out of the project cash flows generated The equity payback considers project cash flows from its inception as well as the leverage level of debt of the project which makes it a better time indicator of the project merits than the simple payback The model uses the year number and the cumulative after tax cash flows in order to calculate this value Note that equity payback was referred to Year to positive cash flow in previous RETScreen models Net Present Value NPV The model calculates the Net Present Val
242. ng requirements for the plant and smaller plants can have very high annual cost compared to the project cost Labour costs in isolated areas are typically twice the rate found in most urban locations Productivity is often less as resources are limited and an annual allowance should be made for travel room and board costs associated with annual maintenance The costs proposed should thus be adjusted accordingly if appropriate CHP 141 RETScreen Software Online User Manual GHG monitoring amp verification Greenhouse gas GHG monitoring is generally carried out by project proponents in accordance with the data requirements and methods laid out in the Monitoring Plan If additional data needs to be collected in order to estimate GHG emissions the cost of collecting that data and quantifying emissions reductions should be estimated Note that in the case of Clean Development Mechanism CDM projects sustainable development indicators will also need to be monitored For small scale CDM projects capacity of 15 MW or energy savings of 15 GWh or less monitoring requirements will be simplified and therefore the estimated costs should be reduced See UNFCCC s CDM Website for details on monitoring requirements for CDM projects Most GHG projects will also require third party verification of emissions reductions on an annual or periodic basis For Joint Implementation JI projects verification results in an independent confirmation o
243. ngle project using different quantity and cost ranges selecting a new range reference Custom 1 to Custom 5 enables the user to keep track of different cost scenarios Hence the user may retain a record of up to 5 different quantities and cost ranges that can be used in future RETScreen analyses and thus create a localised cost database CHP 223 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Figures amp Tables Weather Database Map RETScreen International Online Weather Database Heating Only Project Heating Heating system load Power Only Project Power system CHP 224 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Cooling Only Project Cooling system Combined Heating amp Power Project Heating Heating system load Recovered heat Power Electricity system CHP 225 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Combined Cooling amp Power Project Cooling system Electricity Combined Heating amp Cooling Project Heating Heating system load Cooling system CHP 226 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Combined Cooling Heating amp Power Project Heating Heating system load Recovered heat Cooling system Electricity Power system CHP 227 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load 1 500 1 250 1 000 41 gt x Z 750
244. nnual savings and or income realised due to the implementation of the proposed case system Fuel cost Base case The model calculates the total fuel cost for the base case power heating and or cooling systems The annual value of fuel cost for the base case is escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate Customer premium income rebate The model calculates the customer premium income rebate This value is calculated by multiplying the base case power heating and cooling systems fuel costs by the electricity heating and or cooling premium income or rebate The annual values of the electricity heating and or cooling premium income rebate are escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate CHP 159 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Electricity export income The model calculates the electricity export income This value is calculated by multiplying the electricity exported to grid by the electricity export rate The annual value of the electricity export income is escalated at the electricity export escalation rate CE production income duration The model calculates the annual CE production income This value is calculated by multiplying the CE production and the CE production credit rate The annual value of CE production income is escalated at the CE production credit escalation rate GHG reduction income duration The model calculates the annual GHG reduction income which represents the income generated by the
245. nology Centre Ottawa Natural Resources Canada 2003 Community Energy Technologies CANMET Energy Technology Centre Ottawa Natural Resources Canada 1997 The Danish Energy Agency Engerstatistics 1995 1999 Environmental Protection Agency Climate Protection Partnership Division Technology Characterization Fuel Cells April 2002 Fenhann J Personal Communication 2000 Fenhann J Projections of Emissions of Greenhouse Gases Ozone Precursors and Sulphur Dioxide from Danish Sources until 2010 The Danish Energy Agency December 1999 GHG Protocol Initiative Calculating CO2 Emissions from the Combustion of Standard Fuels and from Electricity Steam Purchase Ver 2 1a WRI and WBCSD 2004 Hayden S Personal Communication CANMET Energy Technology Centre Ottawa Natural Resources Canada 1997 The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of Water and Steam Erlangen Germany 1997 International Energy Agency IEA 2002 CHP 268 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Larsson I Personal communication FVB Energy Stockholm Sweden 2003 Leng G RETScreen International A Decision Support and Capacity Building Tool for Assessing Potential Renewable Energy Projects UNEP Industry amp Environment 3rd Quarter 2000 Martinot E and McDoom O Promoting Energy Efficiency and Re
246. ns associated with the T amp D losses for the proposed case power system T amp D losses The user enters the transmission and distribution T amp D losses of the proposed case power system which includes all energy losses between the power plant and the end user This value will vary based on the voltage of transport lines the distance from the site of energy production to the point of use peak energy demands ambient temperature and electricity theft In addition T amp D system type e g AC vs DC and quality may also influence losses Units are given as a percentage of all electricity losses to electricity exported to the grid Electricity delivered to the load within the project is assumed to have no transmission and distribution losses As a first estimate it is reasonable to assume T amp D losses of 8 to 10 in modern grids in industrialised countries and 10 to 20 in grids located in developing countries GHG emission reduction summary Based on the GHG emission data entered the model calculates the annual reduction in GHG emissions when the base case system is displaced with the proposed case system If the baseline for electricity production changes during the project life then the model calculates the annual GHG reduction for both periods of the base case that is for the years before the change in baseline and for the years following the change in baseline Years of occurrence If the user has entered that the projec
247. nses are paid at the end of the year in which they are earned or incurred The effective income tax rate is assumed to be constant throughout the project life Note that sales tax should be considered in the Initial Costs section of the Cost Analysis worksheet and that property tax should be considered in the Annual Costs section Loss carryforward The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not losses are carried forward i e whether or not a loss a negative taxable income in a given year can be used to lower taxes owed in that same year or can be deferred to offset profits from future years If the user selects Yes losses are carried forward and applied against taxable income and or savings in the following years thereby reducing the income tax owed up to the accumulated losses years after the losses occur If the user selects No losses are not carried forward but rather lost and thereby never used to offset any other year taxable income If the user selects Flow through losses are not carried forward but rather used in the year in which they occur and applied against profits from sources other than the project or qualify and generate a refundable tax credit thereby reducing the income tax owed in the years in which losses occur CHP 148 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Whether losses must be carried forward or not will depend on the tax laws in the jurisdiction in which
248. ntermediate load power system 3 Peak load power system typically designed to meet only a small portion of the annual electricity demand that occurs during peak periods and or 4 Back up power system optional which is used in case of interruption of the other systems If the load is connected to the electricity grid the grid can act as a peak and back up power system See the following figures Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load Base load power system The user enters the information about the base load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Type The user selects the base load power system type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Operating strategy The user selects the operating strategy in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet If there is a base and an intermediate load power system the base load power system operating strategy is assumed to be Full power capacity output CHP 18 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Capacity The user enters the capacity of the base load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the base load
249. nters monthly values for electricity demand for up to four different rate periods the peak load for the month the monthly fixed charge and the total electricity cost for the month The model then calculates the average load for each month the system peak electricity load over maximum monthly average the annual peak load the annual electricity demand and the base case electricity rate These values can then be used in the Base case load characteristics section of the Load amp Network worksheet to help the user complete the analysis Rate kWh The user enters the electricity demand per month for each relevant rate period Peak load The user enters the peak electricity load per month Fixed charge monthly The user enters the fixed charge per month Total electricity cost The user enters the total electricity cost per month CHP 216 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Average load The model calculates the average electricity load per month by dividing the electricity demand by the number of hours per month These values can then be used in the Base case load characteristics section of the Load amp Network worksheet in the Power gross average load column to help the user complete the analysis System peak electricity load over max monthly average The model calculates the system peak electricity load over maximum monthly average load which represents the percentage that the peak elect
250. ntry region from the drop down list RETScreen includes electricity generation GHG emission factors for a number of countries and sub regions for the year 2002 for all countries and 2000 for Canadian provinces Transmission and Distribution T amp D losses are not included in these factors T amp D losses are added separately by the user GHG Protocol Initiative 2004 International Energy Agency 2002 and the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change 2004 Note that GHG emission factors will vary year to year and from fuel to fuel The user should use more recent information if readily available However in the absence of other data this country region information provides a reasonable first estimate Fuel type Standard or Custom analysis The user selects the fuel type from the drop down list The RETScreen software can model the GHG emissions of any electricity supply system The fuel type is the fuel s or power plant s which will be displaced by the proposed project If the user selects one of the fuel types from the drop down list default emission factor and fuel conversion efficiency values will be inserted into the row inputs of the table If a specific fuel type is not included in the drop down list the user may choose User defined For Custom analyses the user enters values for the remainder of the row inputs For standard analyses the user enters the factors in the Tools worksheet Fuel type Sim
251. nual annual value of CE production income is escalated at the CE production credit escalation rate The annual CE production income is transferred to the Project costs and savings income summary section CE production credit duration The user enters the Clean Energy CE production credit duration year This value typically represents the number of years for which the project receives a CE production credit CE production credit escalation rate The user enters the Clean Energy CE production credit escalation rate which is the projected annual average rate of increase in the CE production credit rate over the life of the project This allows the user to apply rates of inflation to the value of CE production credit rate which might be different from general inflation GHG reduction income The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not greenhouse gas GHG reduction income is applicable If the user ticks the box certain input fields will be added to allow the user to customise the GHG reduction income analysis according to the specific circumstances of the project Note that if the user did not select to perform the GHG Analysis in the GHG Analysis worksheet then the user can not use this option Net GHG reduction yr 1 to x 1st period The model calculates the net annual average GHG reduction in equivalent tonnes of CO per year tco2 yr resulting from the implementation of the proposed case system instead
252. oad cooling system fuel source or fuel type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet CHP 30 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Capacity The user enters the capacity of the peak load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the peak load cooling system capacity over the proposed case cooling system peak load is calculated Cooling delivered The model calculates the cooling delivered by the peak load cooling system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the cooling delivered by the peak load cooling system over the proposed case cooling system energy demand is also calculated Back up cooling system optional The back up cooling system is designed to meet the cooling demand in case of failure by the base load and or peak load cooling systems This is an optional equipment and its use will depend on how critical the cooling loads are and whether or not the peak load cooling system is sufficient to provide all the back up cooling Type The user enters optional back up cooling system type considered if required Capacity The user enters the capacity of the optional back up cooling system Back up cooling system might be part of a system Back up cooling system is used if the loss o
253. oad on a monthly basis Note This column is only visible if the proposed project includes power CHP 62 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Cooling time process operating The user enters the cooling time process operating on a monthly basis If the process operates 24 hours day 7 days week 100 of the time during a month the user enters 100 If the process does not operate during a month the user enters 0 Note This column is only visible if Detailed is selected for Process cooling load characteristics Cooling average load The model calculates the monthly average cooling load for the base case cooling system based on monthly weather inputs non weather dependant cooling cooling load for building building zone or building cluster peak process cooling load and if detailed process cooling load is selected the cooling time process operating When Standard process cooling load characteristics is selected the process load is assumed to be the same for each month of the year A period for peak load is created to take into account weather dependent loads that occur during extreme temperatures Note This column is only visible if the proposed project includes cooling Heating time process operating The user enters the heating time process operating on a monthly basis If the process operates 24 hours day 7 days week 100 of the time during a month the user enters 100 If the process d
254. odel Capacity The user enters the capacity of the optional back up power system Back up power system might be part of a system A common rule of thumb is that each power plant should have back up capability equal to the largest system For example a back up generator might be utilised in the case of an unexpected system shutdown The back up power system capacity can be calculated as the largest capacity by comparing the sizes of the base load intermediate load and the peak load power systems In some cases a designer may choose not to include a back up system rather relying only on the peak load power system This entry does not impact the energy calculations it is only used in the Cost Analysis worksheet Heating The proposed case heating system analysed can include five main components as follows 1 Base load heating system which could supply heat from a boiler furnace etc or heat recovered from power generation equipment or from a process Typically this is the primary heating system designed to meet the majority of the annual base load heating demand 2 Intermediate load heating system which could supply heat from a boiler etc or heat recovered from power generation equipment or from a process 3 Intermediate load heating system 2 which is only available if the system includes base and intermediate load power systems Typically this is the secondary heating system designed to meet most of the remaining heating d
255. oes not operate during a month the user enters 0 Note This column is only visible if Detailed is selected for Process heating load characteristics Heating average load The model calculates the monthly average heating load for the base case heating system based on monthly weather inputs domestic hot water heating base demand heating load for building building zone or building cluster peak process heating load and if detailed process heating load is selected the heating time process operating When Standard process heating load characteristics is selected the process load is assumed to be the same for each month of the year A period for peak load is created to take into account weather dependent loads that occur during extreme temperatures Note This column is only visible if the proposed project includes heating CHP 63 RETScreen Software Online User Manual System peak electricity load over max monthly average The user enters the system peak electricity load over maximum monthly average load for the base case power system which represents the percentage that the peak electricity load exceeds the maximum monthly average power load over the twelve month period Peak load annual The model calculates the annual peak load Electricity demand The model calculates annual electricity demand Electricity rate base case The user enters the average electricity rate for the base case power system Tot
256. of the base case or baseline system for the years preceding the change in baseline emission factor for the base case electricity system This value is calculated in the GHG Analysis worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet Net GHG reduction yr x 1 and beyond 2nd period The model calculates the annual net GHG reduction in equivalent tonnes of CO per year tco2 yr resulting from the implementation of the proposed case system instead of the base case or baseline system This value is calculated in the GHG Analysis worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Financial Summary worksheet For projects in which a change in baseline emission factor for the base case electricity system has been selected in the GHG Analysis worksheet the model indicates the net annual GHG emission reduction for the years following the change CHP 154 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Net GHG reduction project life The model calculates the cumulative net GHG reduction for the duration of the project life in equivalent tonnes of CO tco2 resulting from the implementation of the proposed case system instead of the base case or baseline system This value is calculated by multiplying the appropriate annual net GHG reduction by the project life GHG reduction credit rate The user enters the GHG reduction credit per equivalent tonne of CO tcoz It is used in conjunction with the net GH
257. on amp registration Greenhouse gas GHG projects might need to be validated by an independent third party organisation to ensure that the project design documents including the GHG baseline study and Monitoring Plan meet the prescribed requirements Validation includes the confirmation that the emission reductions claimed by the project developer are considered realistic GHG projects must then be registered through an accredited organisation Validation is necessary for Clean Development Mechanism CDM projects and must be carried out by an operational entity that has been certified by the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNFCCC See UNFCCC s CDM Website for further details For other projects third party validation may provide investors with increased confidence that the estimated emissions reductions will be achieved The cost of validation will vary according to the size of the project For the validation of CDM projects a prescribed rate of US 400 day has been set for the staff of designated operational entities or US 1 200 day for a team of three The Prototype Carbon Fund PCF estimates the cost of validation of large projects at US 30 000 CHP 123 RETScreen Software Online User Manual CDM projects will also require a registration fee to be paid to the UNFCCC for administration Registration fees for CDM projects are scaled according to the size of the project as presented in the Registration Fe
258. on reduction calculated on the GHG Analysis worksheet which are given in equivalent tonnes of CO emissions per year tco2 yr by pasting the value in the cell CHP 218 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Custom 1 to 3 These tools are provided to allow the user to prepare custom tools for RETScreen Three Blank Worksheets are also provided in a similar fashion These custom tools and blank worksheets can be used for example to enter more details about the project to prepare graphs to perform a more detailed sensitivity analysis and to create a custom database The user may also use these custom tools and or worksheets to develop a companion model to RETScreen CHP 219 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Product Data Some of the product data requirements for the model are provided in the RETScreen Online Product Database To access the product database specific to the type of system being considered the user should click on the blue underlined hyperlink next to the entry cell that says see product database or see PDB The product database provides information on the equipment associated with the project From the online product database dialogue box the user may obtain product specification and performance data as well as company contact information The product database sorting routine starts by using the system being designed and Type selected by the user in the Energy Model or Equi
259. onversion efficiencies and T amp D losses of the different fuel types For each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of heat energy generated kg GJ For the total electricity mix shown on the bottom row of the table units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of end use electricity delivered For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N O emission factors for a number of fuels are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC Reference CHP 174 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered Electricity generation efficiency The user enters the electricity generation efficiency for the selected fuel type The electricity generation efficiency is the efficiency of energy conversion from primary heat potential to actual power plant output This value is used to calculate for each fuel type the aggregate GHG emission factor and therefore is only relevant for fuel types which actually produce greenhouse gases i e with non zero CO CH and NO emission factors For example a typical coal fired power plant could have an elec
260. or a more detailed analysis regarding electricity generation efficiency and T amp D losses and using the custom analysis the user can prepare an even more detailed analysis regarding emission factors etc If the user has access to dispatch information from the local utility the Base case electricity system table can be used to model the marginal fuel use on the grid which may more accurately represent the fuels and the emissions that are being displaced by the proposed project For example if dispatch information shows that the fuel used on the margin is natural gas 85 of the time and fuel oil 15 of the time the user would enter these details into the base case table along with the corresponding GHG coefficients The resulting baseline is often referred to as the operating margin Another baseline option referred to as the build margin can be calculated by modeling recent capacity additions for example the 5 most recent plants that have been added to the grid The build margin can be modeled in the base case table by entering recent capacity additions along with their relative generating capacities scaled to total 100 and appropriate GHG coefficients It is suggested that the user take a conservative approach in calculating the baseline emission factor for the project particularly at the pre feasibility analysis stage CHP 172 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Country region The user selects the cou
261. ormation Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel Typical minimum capacity for reciprocating engines is 25 Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated CHP 80 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the
262. orted to grid 19 20 81 83 92 98 101 102 104 106 107 108 110 152 182 Electricity generation efficiency 0 175 Electricity premium rebate eee 150 Electricity premium income rebate 151 Electricity rate 62 64 109 110 214 216 217 Electricity rate base case 62 64 109 217 Electricity rate monthly eee eeeeeeeee 216 Electricity rate proposed Case eee 110 Electricity rate time of USe e eee 214 CHP 271 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Emission Factors for Diesel Generator Systems in kgCO2equ kWh for Three Different Levels of Load Factor 0 ccceeeeee 7 260 Endhase 39 53 64 144 149 159 214 End of project life eee 144 149 159 End of project life cost credit 0 0 eee 159 End use energy efficiency measures 39 53 64 Energy charge sestier nsira 215 Energy efficiency measures 130 131 133 Energy Model 11 12 14 15 17 18 19 20 24 25 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 45 47 48 50 58 61 68 69 71 73 75 76 77 78 80 83 85 101 103 105 106 107 109 110 111 112 116 128 131 132 143 145 153 180 196 211 212 220 Energy project nesnosne 208 Energy transfer station s 44 45 57 58 131 132 Energy transfer station s connection type 44 57 Energy transfer station s cost 44 45 57 58 Energy transfer station s cost factor 44 57 Engineerin
263. ose that would have occurred without the project and actual emissions that occur after a project has been implemented Guidelines are available at the UNFCCC s CDM Website on how to demonstrate additionality A baseline approach is the basis for defining a baseline methodology The Conference of the Parties has agreed to the following three approaches for CDM project activities 1 Existing actual or historical emissions as applicable 2 Emissions from a technology that represents an economically attractive course of action taking into account barriers to investment 3 The average emissions of similar project activities undertaken in the previous five years in similar social economic environmental and technological circumstances and whose performance is among the top 20 per cent of their category CHP 168 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The RETScreen GHG Analysis worksheet can be used for each of these approaches Note that although the Executive Board has approved these three baseline approaches they are simply guidelines In order to register a CDM project the baseline must be developed using an approved methodology A baseline methodology is an application of one of the allowable baseline approaches as defined to an individual project activity reflecting aspects such as sector and region Baseline methodologies for CDM projects must be approved by the Executive Board If project proponents wis
264. ot considered renewable energy unless the biomass is harvested in a sustainable manner The time required to carry out a brief resource assessment is typically 1 to 5 person days depending on the extent of the field survey and the amount of data collection and analysis involved Typical rates range from 300 to 1 000 This assessment can usually be combined with the site investigation The costs of charter flights might need to be added if an aerial survey is required add to Travel amp accommodation Environmental assessment An environmental assessment is an essential part of the feasibility study work While CHP projects can usually be developed in an environmentally acceptable manner projects can often be designed to enhance environmental conditions work is required to study the potential environmental impacts of any proposed case project At the feasibility study stage the objective of the environmental assessment is to determine if there is any major environmental impact that could prevent the implementation of a project Noise and visual impacts as well as potential impact on the flora and fauna must be addressed The time required to consult with the different stakeholders gather and process relevant data and possibly visit the site and local communities typically falls between 1 and 8 person days The average per daily fees of the personnel making the assessment will range from 300 to 1 000 depending on their experience
265. ower heating and or cooling systems System peak load The model calculates the proposed case system s peak heating cooling and or power system peak loads CHP 66 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model System energy demand The model calculates the proposed case system s heating cooling and or power system energy demands Note At this point the user should complete the Equipment Selection worksheet CHP 67 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Equipment Selection As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software the Equipment Selection worksheet is used to select the equipment for the proposed case system This worksheet is also used to select the operating strategy used for the selected power generation equipment Show alternative units In the Equipment Selection worksheet both metric and imperial units can be shown simultaneously by ticking the Show alternative units check box at the top the worksheet The values calculated in the units selected in the Energy Model worksheet are displayed in the main column and the values calculated in the alternative units are displayed in the column to the right Proposed case cooling system In this section the user enters the information about the proposed case base load and or peak load cooling systems See the following figure Cooling System Load Definition Proposed case system load characteristics graph The proposed case sy
266. p Power Project Model Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines LHV lt 6MW at g T ki OL 4 0 Power capacity kW 4 Typical Heat Rates for Reciprocating Engines HHV lt 6MW Heat rate HHV KJ kWh 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 Power capacity kW CHP 231 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW Heat rate LHV KJ kWh 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 Power capacity kW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Z 10 n a J 1 Z ae P me 100 I 000 i 00 oD 6 000 100 le Power capacity kW CHP 232 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW N lt x L w 6 1 so T so a 45 10 Power capacity kW ail Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW HHV KJ kWh i Heat rate Power capacity kW 00 40 000 45 000 50 000 CHP 233 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW Heat rate LHV KJ kWh Power capacity kW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Heat rate HHV KJ kWh Power capacity kW CHP 234 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power P
267. peration of the system over the project life Grey input cells are provided to allow the user to enter the name of a periodic cost and periodic credit item A periodic cost represents recurrent costs that must be incurred at regular intervals to maintain the project in working condition A periodic cost item is entered in the grey input cell The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The interval in years over which the periodic cost is incurred is entered in the Year column The amount of the cost incurred at each interval is entered in the unit cost column The project may also be credited for periodic costs that would have been incurred over the project life of the base case or conventional energy system The periodic credit item is entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The interval in years over which the periodic credit is incurred is entered in the year column The amount of the credit incurred at each interval is entered in the unit cost column Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column End of project life The user enters the value of the project at the end of its life This amount is also commonly referred to as the salvage value or disposal value If the salvage value of the project at the end of its life is positive then the user selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column in o
268. pical annual heating system efficiency Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling Systems Cooling system type Typical annual cooling system efficiency Heat pump gas 110 CHP 237 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Building Heating Load Chart T z is 2 20 A T o E Heating design temperature C Building Cooling Load Chart P Cooling load W m 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Cooling design temperature C Poor insulation W Medium insulation Good insulation CHP 238 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Community System Building Cluster Layout Heating project Site conditions Nearest location for weather data Heating design temperature Annual heating degree days below 13 C Domestic hot water heating base demand Equivalent degree days for DHW heating Equivalent full load hours 52 m School building Buildi ust Section 3 Section 2 69m Centra 12 m Estimate building Building chust Apartment Notes Range See Weather Database Stockholm 19 4 4 239 1 3 2 278 40 to 15 C Complete Monthly inputs 0 to 25 0 to 10 C d d Base case heating system See technical note on heating network design Heated floor area per building cluster Number of buildings in building cluster Fuel type Seasonal efficiency Heating load calculation Heating load for building cluster Total heating demand Tota
269. pipes in a trench approximately 600 mm deep It also includes the cost for the replacement of existing sidewalks Rocky terrain or installations in areas that have many old utility services e g telephone electricity sewage water etc could increase the calculated cost substantially Typical secondary distribution line pipe costs can be broken down as follows 45 for material 45 for installation and 10 for associated distribution pump system Total building cluster connection cost The model calculates the total building cluster connection cost based on the ETS and secondary distribution pipes costs per building cluster and for all building clusters Summary of main distribution line pipe size The model summarises the pipe sizes specified in the main distribution line sizing section Summary of main distribution line pipe length The model calculates the total length of the main pipe for each pipe diameter Summary of main distribution line pipe cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the model calculates the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories using the Typical Costs for Cooling Distribution Line Pipes graph If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories The model then calculates the total cost for all the main distribution line CHP 59 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The costs show
270. ple the proposed case heating system could be built by an Energy Services Company ESCO and the existing heating system can be disconnected and no future maintenance or operating costs will be required by the end use customer e g building owner By entering a negative value rebate it means that heating is sold for less than the base case fuel cost Heating premium income rebate The model calculates the heating premium income or rebate This value is calculated by multiplying the base case heating system fuel cost by the heating premium or rebate The annual value of the heating premium income rebate is escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate Cooling premium rebate The user enters the annual cooling premium or rebate negative value as a percentage of the base case cooling system annual fuel cost This permits the user to apply rates that are either higher or lower than what is paid for cooling in the base case By selecting a positive value premium it means that the end user is willing to pay more for cooling delivered by the proposed case cooling system For example the proposed case cooling system could be built by an Energy System Company ESCO and the existing cooling system can be disconnected and no future maintenance or operating costs will be required by the end use customer e g building owner By entering a negative value rebate it means that cooling is sold for less than the base case fuel cost CHP
271. plementing the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures This value is used to calculate the cooling system load in the Proposed case load characteristics section located at the bottom of this worksheet as well as the net peak cooling load and the net cooling demand for the proposed case system Typical values range from 0 to 25 depending on the measures implemented Note These proposed case end use energy efficiency measures are in addition to the improvements in energy efficiency that result from implementing the proposed case system as calculated in the other worksheets For example as part of implementing a new cooling heating and or power system the user might also want to implement other measures such as improved building insulation that reduce the load that the new proposed case system will have to meet Net peak cooling load The model calculates the annual net peak cooling load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the instantaneous cooling required from the proposed case cooling system to meet the largest space cooling load including base load cooling and or process cooling load after the implementation of the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures It typically coincides with the warmest day of the year for space cooling applications Net cooling demand The model calculates the annual total net cooling demand for the building the building zone or the building cluster This i
272. plied by this pipe section yes no 1 2 3 4 Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Secondary distribution pipes length per building cluster I 65 25 15 I 15 DN 32 DN 40 DN 40 DN 40 CHP 240 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Community System Base Case Heating System and Heating Load Heated floor Number of Heatingload Seasonal Length of Building cluster area m buildings Wim efficiency Fuelrate pipe m eee School building 800 1 100 0 15 kWh a ee Office building 1 000 1 65 70 0 18 L 2 la F Apartment building 1 500 1 100 60 11 MWh Community System Base Case Cooling System and Cooling Load Building cluster 2 Hospital 1 65 0 6 L 25 Cooled floor Number of Coolingload Seasonal Length of Building cluster area m buildings Wim efficiency Fuelrate pipe m House2 150 1 20 300 015 kWh Houses 150 1 20 300 015 Se r w an osmon os r w an onmo is aw n w som orson is aw n os som lessons os 20 20 20 20 20 25 CHP 241 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical District Heating Supply and Return Temperatures U a g _ Q a E o _ 20 oO _ a jue Q Ambient temperature C Typical District Cooling Supply and Return Temperatures Distict cooling temperature C Ambiant temperature C Return Supply
273. plified analysis The user selects the fuel type from the drop down list RETScreen includes electricity generation GHG emission factors for a number of countries and sub regions All types refers to all fuels on the grid The user can also select Natural gas Coal Oil 6 or Other depending on the type of fuel s displaced by the proposed case power system Fuel mix The user enters the fuel mix of the base case electricity system for each fuel type Units are given as percentages of total electricity supplied Note that the user should verify that the sum of all fuel types listed in the fuel mix column equals 100 CHP 173 RETScreen Software Online User Manual CQ2 CH and N20 emission factors Custom analysis The user enters the CO2 CH and N20 emission factors for the different fuel types They represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of power plants For grid connected projects the user should enter factors representative of large generating plants On the electricity mix row at the bottom of the table the model calculates the equivalent emission factors for the global electricity mix and per unit of electricity delivered The electricity mix factors thus account for a weighted average of the electricity generation efficiencies and T amp D losses of the different fuel types For
274. pment Selection worksheet From the dialogue box the user selects for example the Manufacturer Model and the number of units The data can be pasted from the dialogue box to the spreadsheets by clicking on the Paste Data button Only data that are in bold are pasted to the spreadsheets all other data are provided for reference purposes only Data entered using the product database may be overwritten i e the user may prefer to use other data and can manually enter values into the spreadsheets Other information such as product fuel type is provided to help the user prepare the study The product database contains a link to the Websites of some product suppliers In the case where the Website link cannot be activated the user should try using another browser Note that the capacity provided in the product database for some technologies e g reciprocating engines is an indication only and needs to be verified with the manufacturer for each specific application Reciprocating engines for example are rated for ISO conditions 15 C 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity and for specific fuels therefore the type of fuel used and the site conditions such as humidity temperature and altitude will have an effect on the actual capacity Also an engine can run at a higher output then rated capacity but it will have a shorter lifespan and will require more maintenance For shorter projects a higher capacity can be entered in the model since the rat
275. power capacity ST with extraction The percentage of the total power capacity GTCC with extraction over the total power system peak load is also calculated Power capacity ST without extraction The model calculates the power capacity of the steam turbine ST without extraction The percentage of the power capacity ST without extraction over the proposed case power system peak load is also calculated Total power capacity GTCC without extraction The model calculates the total power capacity without extraction for the gas turbine combined cycle GTCC power system by adding the gas turbine power capacity GT to the steam turbine power capacity ST without extraction The percentage of the total power capacity GTCC without extraction over the total power system peak load is also calculated Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Return temperature The user enters the return temperature or feedwater temperature for the steam turbin
276. power system capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load by the base load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load by the base load power system over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid by the base load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Intermediate load power system The user enters the information about the intermediate load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Type The user selects the intermediate load power system type in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Operating strategy The user selects the operating strategy in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Capacity The user enters the capacity of the intermediate load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet CHP 19 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The percentage of
277. pressure port for the heating load Refer to the Steam Turbine Schematic for more information Steam flow The user enters the steam flow available at the inlet of the steam turbine Typical values for steam flow range from 1 000 kg h 150 kW to 2 500 000 kg h 1 000 MW Operating pressure The user enters the operating pressure of the steam turbine Refer to the Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperatures table for information Saturation temperature The model calculates the steam saturation temperature The saturation temperature is the boiling point at the selected steam operating pressure CHP 93 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Superheated temperature The user enters the superheated temperature of the steam If superheated steam is not required the user enters the saturation temperature calculated by the model Superheated steam is defined as steam heated to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature while maintaining the saturation pressure It cannot exist in contact with water nor contain water and resembles a perfect gas Superheated steam might be called surcharged steam anhydrous steam or steam gas It increases the steam turbine efficiency Superheating of the steam also means that smaller size pipes can be used for the steam distribution system Enthalpy The model calculates the enthalpy of the steam at the input of the steam turbine Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat
278. production credit duration 153 154 CE production credit escalation rate 153 154 160 CE production credit rate 153 154 160 189 190 CE production income 06 153 154 160 CE production income duration 4 160 Cell colour coding 000 eeeteeseesecneeeeeneeeeeeeees 10 CH4 emission factor 197 200 203 208 210 Change in GHG emission factor 00 176 CHP model flow chatt eccceseeseeteeeteeseeeee 9 CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation 6 81 82 84 86 87 103 108 109 255 Civilid si Sti iho r ees Reed ates 127 Clean Energy CE production income 153 Click here to calculate risk analysis 192 193 194 195 CO2 emission factor 197 200 203 210 CO2 CH4 and N20 emission factors 174 178 180 Combined Cooling amp Power Project 4 17 226 Combined Cooling Heating amp Power Project 4 17 227 Combined Heat amp Power Project Model 14 17 Combined Heating amp Cooling Project 4 17 226 Combined Heating amp Power Project 4 17 225 Community benefits 0 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 142 Community System Base Case Cooling System and Cooling Load cesseseeee 5 49 241 Community System Base Case Heating System and Heating Load ceeeeeseeeeees 5 35 241 Community System Building Cluster Layout 5 35 49 239 Compressor Cooling System Sch
279. proposed project This GHG emission reduction analysis worksheet contains five main sections Settings Base case electricity system Baseline Base case system GHG summary Baseline Proposed case system GHG summary Project and GHG emission reduction summary The settings section is used to indicate whether or not the optional GHG Analysis worksheet is used and to select the preferred type of analysis It also provides GHG global warming potential factors The Base case electricity system and Base case system GHG summary sections provide a description of the emission profile of the baseline system The Proposed case system GHG summary section provides a description of the emission profile of the proposed project The GHG emission reduction summary section provides a summary of the estimated GHG emission reduction based on the data entered by the user in the preceding sections Results are calculated as equivalent tonnes of CO avoided per annum This is an optional analysis inputs entered in this worksheet will not affect results reported in other worksheets except for the GHG related items that appear in the Financial Summary and Sensitivity worksheets Greenhouse gases include water vapour carbon dioxide CO2 methane CH3 nitrous oxide N O ozone O3 and several classes of halo carbons that is chemicals that contain carbon together with fluorine chlorine and bromine Greenhouse gases allow solar radiation to enter the Earth s atmosphe
280. r 1 Electricity export income The model calculates the annual electricity export income This value is calculated by multiplying the electricity exported to grid by the electricity export rate The annual value of the electricity export income is escalated at the electricity export escalation rate The annual electricity export income is transferred to the Project costs and savings income summary section CHP 152 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Electricity export escalation rate The user enters the electricity export escalation rate which is the projected annual average rate of increase in electricity export rate over the life of the project This permits the user to apply rates of inflation to the value of electricity export rate which might be different from general inflation Clean Energy CE production income The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not Clean Energy CE production income is applicable If the user ticks the box certain input fields will be added to allow the user to customise the CE production income analysis according to the specific circumstances of the project Note that if the user did not select at the bottom of the Energy Model worksheet any fuels or systems that can benefit from a CE production credit then the user can not use this option CE production The model calculates the annual Clean Energy CE production The user selects which fuel or system can ben
281. r CHP applications Power capacity The user enters the power capacity The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide CHP 103 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Capacity factor The user enters the capacity factor which represents the ratio of the average power produced by the wind plant over a year to its rated power capacity Typical values for wind plant capacity factor range from 20 to 40 The lower end of the range is representative of older technologies installed in average wind regimes while the higher end of the range represents the latest wind turbines installed in good wind regimes The user can refer to the RETScreen International Wind Energy Project Model to calculate this value Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section
282. r Manual Reciprocating Engine Installed Cost Examples 6 129 256 Reciprocating Engine Schematic 5 80 247 Registration Fees for CDM Projects 7 124 260 Remaining electricity required eee 110 Remaining fuel required cece eeeeeeeeeeeee 209 Remaining heat required cecesseeseereees 111 Remaning Fuel Required eee eeeeeeeee 263 Report preparation ceeecseseeecseeeeceeeeeeees 120 Resource assessment 0 0 cece ese eteeee eee eeee 118 Return temperature eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 92 98 Risk analysis naaar 185 186 Risk analysis fot 0 eseeeseseeeeesecneeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Road CONStIUCtION cece eeeeeecseeseeneeeeceeeeeeens 129 S Saturation temperature 74 88 93 100 218 Saving a leoa aeiee er tE eies 13 Seasonal efficiency 26 28 36 50 70 72 74 76 98 Second Currency ssssesseseseeeeeee 12 114 115 116 Secondary cooling distribution line pipe 133 Secondary cooling distribution lines 56 Secondary distribution line pipe cost 44 46 58 59 Secondary distribution line pipe cost factor44 58 Secondary heating distribution line pipe 131 Secondary heating distribution lines 42 Secondary pipe network oversizing 43 56 Select base load power system 0 eee 111 Select operating strategy 112 Sensitivity analysis 0 0 eeeseseeecteereeeeeeeees 185 Sensitivity analysis
283. r Project Model heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Heating capacity with extraction The model calculates the heating capacity with extraction if an extraction port is included based on the steam flow maximum extraction pressure and temperature at the extraction port pressure and temperature at the back pressure port and return temperature The heating capacity is the useful heat produced by the power equipment that can be recovered for the heating load If the proposed project does not include heating or if the heating load is lower than the heating capacity this heat has to be removed i e the power equipment has to be cooled down Geothermal system Geothermal systems produce electricity for the power load using the natural heat of the earth The model assumes that there is no waste heat recovered for CHP applications Steam flow The user enters the steam flow available at the inlet of the steam turbine Typical values for steam flow range from 1 000 kg h 150 kW to 2 500 000 kg h 1 000 MW Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model and capacity The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can also enter the equipment power capacity for refer
284. r area for building 0 0 0 eee 35 Heated floor area for per building zone cluster E EE AEE A E EEE E E S 35 Heated floor area per building cluster 36 Heated floor area per building zone 36 CALC iescisscoscns iesbucb r adeooeasces nuts 75 Heating 4 6 16 17 23 24 25 26 28 33 35 37 40 41 45 46 63 66 72 73 74 75 76 82 85 87 88 93 98 99 103 109 112 130 131 151 157 196 197 199 200 202 203 207 212 213 224 225 226 227 229 230 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 254 259 268 269 Heating time process operating 0 63 Heating average load oe eeeseeseeeeeneeeeeeeene 63 Heating capacity 82 85 87 88 93 98 99 103 109 213 Heating capacity without extraction 93 98 Heating capacity with extraction 93 99 Heating capacity after duct firing 88 Heating delivered 24 25 26 28 73 75 Heating design temperature 0 0 0 cee eeeeeeeeee 33 Heating equipMent eee eee eseeeeereeteeneeeee 131 Heating load calculation 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 Heating Load Following 6 112 254 Heating load for building zone cluster 37 Heating net average load n 66 Heating Only Project eee eeeeeseeeee 4 17 224 Heating pipe design criteria eee eee 40 Heating premium rebate 151 Heating premium income rebate 151 Heating project eie
285. r enters the peak process cooling load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This value depends on the process type and size used in the building but it is assumed to be weather independent If the process cooling load or a portion of it is weather dependent e g cold storage it can be entered as part of the cooling load for building building zone or building cluster Process cooling load characteristics The user selects the process cooling load characteristics from the drop down list The Detailed option allows the user to enter the percentage of time the process is operating on a monthly basis in the Base case load characteristics section located at the bottom of this worksheet If the Standard option is selected the process load is assumed to be the same for each month of the year and is calculated based on the peak process cooling load and the equivalent full load hours for the process cooling load Equivalent full load hours process cooling The equivalent full load hours for the process cooling load is defined as the annual process cooling demand divided by the peak process cooling load This value is expressed in hours and is equivalent to the number of hours that a cooling system sized exactly for the peak process cooling load would operate at rated capacity to meet the annual process cooling demand If the Standard option for the process cooling load characteristics is selected the user enters the
286. r example the buildings used to house small commercial biomass heating equipment and to provide fuel storage are usually similar to a heated garage The buildings must have a concrete floor and the walls of the fuel storage reserve must be strong enough to permit the use of a front end loader The building for a large CHP plant is similar to an industrial building Carrying out a site layout and building design involves typically 2 to 4 person days for a small plant and up to 100 person days for a large plant Variables include site restrictions type of delivery vehicles to be used and the turning space required and space needed to store and handle fuel Rates of 300 to 1 000 per person day are common Mechanical design The principal mechanical engineering tasks will be associated with design and planning of the assembly and installation of equipment The cost of the mechanical engineering should be based on an estimate of the time required by experts to complete the necessary work It can involve between 20 and 10 000 person days at a rate of between 300 and 1 000 As an example a typical CHP plant producing in the 20 MW scale range will require approximately 2 000 person days while a small heating plant might require a much lower effort of approximately 20 person days Electrical design The principal electrical engineering tasks will be associated with design and planning of construction of the control and electrical protection systems
287. r manual product database and weather database by clicking on the respective icon in the floating RETScreen toolbar For example to access the online user manual the user clicks on the 2 icon CHP 9 RETScreen Software Online User Manual X Microsoft Excel sal File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help BETScreen l SHERRY amp a S Mv Oy a Online User Manual Online Product Database Online Weather Database RETScreen onthe Web gt tot Decision Support Centre arial gt 10 JB zug E 422 Training and Support Internet Forums CHP3 xl Marketplace floating RETScreen toolbar fs QQ Goal Seek aea e Textbook RETScreen Menu and Toolbar The RETScreen Online User Manual or help feature is cursor location sensitive and therefore gives the help information related to the cell where the cursor is located To access the product database specific to the type of system being considered the user should click on the blue underlined hyperlink next to the entry cell that says see product database or see PDB Cell colour coding The user enters data into shaded worksheet cells All other cells that do not require input data are protected to prevent the user from mistakenly deleting a formula or reference cell The RETScreen Cell Colour Coding chart presents the colour coding for input and output cells Input and Output Cells Model output calculated by th
288. range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated debt ratio value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range specified by the user must be a percentage value between 0 and the lowest percentage such that the debt ratio will always fall between O and 100 The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the debt ratio could take For example a range of 10 for a debt ratio of 70 means that the debt ratio could take any value between 63 and 77 Since 70 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the debt ratio is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Debt interest rate The debt interest rate is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the debt interest rate range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated debt interest rate value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range specified by the user must be between O and 100 The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the debt interest rate could take For example a range of 10 for a debt interest rate of 20 means that the debt interest rate cou
289. rder to express this item as a negative value However if the costs of remediation or decommissioning that must be incurred at the end of the project life exceed the salvage value then the user must select cost from the drop down list Note At this point the user should go to the optional GHG Analysis worksheet CHP 144 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Financial Summary As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software a Financial Summary worksheet is provided for each project evaluated This financial analysis worksheet contains seven sections Annual fuel cost summary Financial parameters Annual income Project costs and savings income summary Financial viability Yearly cash flows and Cumulative cash flows graph One of the primary benefits of using the RETScreen software is that it facilitates the project evaluation process for decision makers The Financial Summary worksheet with its financial parameters input items e g discount rate debt ratio etc and its calculated financial viability output items e g IRR simple payback NPV etc allows the project decision maker to consider various financial parameters with relative ease A description of these items including comments regarding their relevance to the preliminary feasibility analysis is included below Annual fuel cost summary This section summarises the base case system peak load energy demand end use energy rate an
290. re but prevent the infrared radiation emitted by the Earth s surface from escaping Instead this outgoing radiation is absorbed by the greenhouse gases and then partially re emitted as thermal radiation back to Earth warming the surface Greenhouse gases that are most relevant to energy project analysis are carbon dioxide CO methane CH4 and nitrous oxide NO these gases are considered in the RETScreen GHG emission reduction analysis RETScreen has been improved to better take into account the emerging rules for carbon finance under the Kyoto Protocol in collaboration with the United Nations Environment Programme UNEP and the Prototype Carbon Fund PCF at The World Bank The Kyoto Protocol is the protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change UNFCCC that was adopted in 1997 in Kyoto at the third Conference of the Parties COP 3 The Kyoto Protocol commits industrialised countries defined as Annex I countries to legally binding greenhouse gas GHG reduction targets during the period between 2008 and 2012 These commitments are on average 5 below 1990 emissions levels The GHG Analysis worksheet of each Workbook file has been developed with a similar framework so as to simplify the task of the user in analysing the viability of different projects Hence the description of each parameter is common for most of the items appearing in the worksheet RETScreen allows the user to evaluate proposed projects in both dom
291. re port If the mixture quality is below 1 0 the steam contains water i e the steam is wet Typically a steam turbine requires a minimum mixture quality in the range of 0 90 to 0 95 If the mixture quality is too low there could be erosion of the steam turbine blades due to the collision of the water droplets and the turbine blades thus increasing the cost of maintenance of the power system Increasing the back pressure increases the mixture quality If the back pressure cannot be increased more than one steam turbine has to be used in conjunction with a reheater or a moisture separator This will help reduce ongoing maintenance costs but will increase the initial cost of equipment CHP 90 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Enthalpy The model calculates the enthalpy of the steam at the output of the back pressure port Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat content of a substance Theoretical steam rate TSR The model calculates the theoretical steam rate TSR of the back pressure steam which represents the theoretical amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Steam turbine ST efficiency The user enters the steam turbine ST efficiency This value includes the losses in the steam turbine for auxiliary power and system losses Typical values for steam turbine efficiency range from 70 to 80 Large steam turbines typically have higher efficiencies than small steam turbines The turbine e
292. red Landfill gas generation rate graph 180 9 000 160 4 8 000 140 4 7 000 12 6 000 c 10 5000 C UO A 4 000 60 4 3 000 40 4 2 000 0 1960 980 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 Year Theoretical Potential Required Fuel Required Annual Landfill gas generation rate graph 180 9 000 160 4 8 000 140 4 7 000 12 6 000 c 10 5000 Z 80 4 000 60 4 3 000 iQ 1960 1980 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 Year Theoretical Potential Required CHP 263 RETScreen Software Online User Manual LFG Fuel Potential Annual Landfill gas generation rate graph 80 9 000 Oo 8 000 40 E 7 000 20 6 000 mt ax DO 5 000 80 4 000 6 3 000 40 2 000 1 000 0 1960 1980 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 Year Theoretical Potential Required m CHP 264 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Training amp Support The user can obtain current information on RETScreen Training amp Support at the following Website address www retscreen net e training CHP 265 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Terms of Use Disclaimer amp indemnification RETScreen International is provided on an as is basis Natural Resources Canada nor does its minister officers employees or agents make any representations or watranties either expressed or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability or fitness
293. red in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Engineering The engineering phase includes costs for the proposed case project site amp building design mechanical design electrical design civil design tenders amp contracting and CHP 125 RETScreen Software Online User Manual construction supervision These costs are detailed below If the project is awarded on a design build basis then all of these costs would be included in prices provided by the equipment supplier or contractor responsible for the project If the project is awarded by tender based on specifications prepared by a consultant then there will be engineering charges from the consultant overseeing the project and perhaps the equipment supplier Site amp building design Site layout includes selecting the site for the CHP plant selecting of the building or cluster of buildings to be heated and or cooled by the district heating and or cooling system determining where approach roads should go for site access and determining the boundaries of the plant yard Fo
294. reduction credit escalation rate which is the projected annual average rate of increase in the GHG reduction credit rate over the project life This allows the user to apply rates of inflation to the value of GHG reduction credit rates which might be different from general inflation Project costs and savings income summary Many of the summary items here are calculated and or entered in the Cost Analysis worksheet and transferred to the Financial Summary worksheet The remainder are calculated and or entered in other parts of the Financial Summary worksheet Initial costs The total initial costs represent the total investment that must be made to bring a project on line before it begins to generate savings and or income The total initial costs are the sum of the estimated feasibility study development engineering power system heating system cooling system and balance of system amp miscellaneous costs and are inputs in the calculation of the simple payback the net present value and the project equity and debt It is important to note that the range of possible costs listed throughout RETScreen do not include sales taxes In a number of jurisdictions clean energy project costs are often exempt from sales taxes Users will have to consider these costs for their region when preparing their evaluations For example if in a particular region sales tax is applicable to the cost of an energy project then the user must add the amount of sa
295. ren 33 Heating system sesser 66 130 157 Heating system load eee eceeeeneeeecneeeeeeeees 66 Heating System Load Definition Base amp Peak Loads cance cide oso avis 4 23 72 73 229 Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load 4 23 72 73 229 Heating System Load Definition Base Intermediate Intermediate 2 amp Peak Load Heating value 16 17 196 197 199 200 202 203 207 212 Heating value amp fuel rate eee 17 212 Heating value of LFG sses 207 Higher heating value HHV 16 196 199 200 202 203 212 Higher or Lower heating value 16 20 25 27 36 50 61 69 71 76 77 78 212 TI OUIS ENESE EEEE 215 Hydro turbe ieres eses iis 105 Hydrog karorni 198 202 Hydrogen sulphide 202 I Impact graphiss ccca nse sind sassisk iss 192 Incentives and grants 0 eeceeseeeeeeeee 146 158 Income tax analysis 1 0 0 eceeeeceeeeeeeeee 148 163 Inerts in waste adjustment factor 207 Inflation ratene o 146 CHP 273 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Initial costs wo eeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 156 185 187 Initial costs Credits ccccecceceesseeeeeseeeeeenee 117 Insurance premium cceeeeeceeeeeteceeeeneeeee 141 Interest during CONStructiON cceeeeeeeeee 140 Intermediate load heating system 23 24 25 73 Intermediate load heating system 2 25 Intermediate load power system 18 19 79 111 L L
296. ricity load exceeds the maximum monthly average load over the twelve month period This value can then be used in the Base case load characteristics section of the Load amp Network worksheet to help the user complete the analysis Peak load annual The model calculates the annual peak load Electricity demand The model calculates annual electricity demand Electricity demand difference The model displays the difference in calculations between annual electricity demand entered by the user from the monthly electricity bills and the amount calculated by the model using average load and peak load values on a monthly basis The user should use the Electricity demand correction factor in the next cell to make this difference reasonably insignificant e g 1 to 2 Electricity demand correction factor The user should enter values in an iterative process until the Electricity demand difference value calculated in the cell above is reasonably insignificant e g 1 to 2 The Goal Seek function in Excel cannot be used for this calculation Electricity rate base case The model calculates the average electricity rate for the base case power system This value can then be used in the Base case load characteristics section of the Load amp Network worksheet to help the user complete the analysis CHP 217 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Water amp steam This tool is used to calculate the properties of water
297. ring methodologies for selected small scale CDM project activity categories including recommendations for determining the project boundary leakage baseline and monitoring Note that small scale CDM projects should not be debundled components of larger project activities as described in Appendix C In accordance with the simplified modalities and procedures for small scale CDM project activities a simplified baseline and monitoring methodology listed in the appendix may be used for a small scale CDM project activity if project participants are able to demonstrate to a designated operational entity that the project activity would otherwise not be implemented due to the existence of one or more barrier s listed below a Investment barrier a financially more viable alternative to the project activity would have led to higher emissions b Technological barrier a less technologically advanced alternative to the project activity involves lower risks due to the performance uncertainty or low market share of the new technology adopted for the project activity and so would have led to higher emissions c Barrier due to prevailing practice prevailing practice or existing regulatory or policy requirements would have led to implementation of a technology with higher emissions d Other barriers without the project activity for another specific reason identified by the participant such as institutional barriers or limited information manageri
298. rk Heating pipe design criteria Design supply temperature Estimate Total 95 Design return temperature 65 Differential temperature Main heating distribution line Main pipe network oversizing Pipe sections Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Total pipe length for main distribution line Secondary heating distribution lines Secondary pipe network oversizing Length of pipe section Pipe size Proposed case district cooling network Cooling pipe design criteria 30 Design supply temperature Design return temperature Differential temperature Main cooling distribution line Main pipe network oversizing Pipe sections Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Total pipe length for main distribution line Secondary cooling distribution lines Secondary pipe network oversizing Length of pipe section Pipe size Pipe size Pipe size Building clusters 21 19 24 18 0 16 0 20 0 MWh MWh MWh z 7 8 S kWh sikh skWh 0 150 0 150 0 150 53 1 060 1 010 S 1 178 0 R 18 0 Is the building cluster supplied by this pipe section yes no 2 3 mm DN 32 DN 50 DN6S Is the building cluster sup
299. roject i e the capacity of a renewable energy system does not exceed 15 MW or the aggregate energy savings by an energy efficiency improvement project does not exceed the equivalent of 15 GWh per year If the project fits within the criteria for small scale CDM projects then the user may be able to take advantage of the simplified baseline methods and other rules and procedures for small scale CDM projects The basic concept of the Clean Development Mechanism is that industrialised countries or companies invest in GHG emission reduction projects in developing countries and gain credits from these projects that they can then apply to their own GHG reduction commitments as agreed to under the Kyoto Protocol Article 12 of the Kyoto Protocol defines the goals of the CDM as eto assist developing countries in achieving sustainable development and in contributing to the ultimate objective of the Convention and e to assist industrialised countries in meeting their quantified emission reduction commitments CHP 167 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The Kyoto Protocol also proscribes that emissions reductions will only be certified if e the CDM project has the approval of the host country e the project produces real measurable and long term GHG benefits and e the reductions in emissions are additional to any that would occur in the absence of the certified project activity Under the Kyoto Protocol an Executive Board E
300. roject Model Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW ost lt gt IL owed v g w w d Power capacity kW p Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW HHV KJ kWh Heat rate a 20 000 25 000 30 000 35 000 40 000 45 000 30 000 Power capacity kW CHP 235 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW Heat rate LHV KJ kWh 100 000 50 000 200 000 250 000 300 000 Power capacity kW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW HHV KJ kWh Heat rate Power capacity kW CHP 236 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel Cell Characteristics Characteristics System 1 System2 System3 System4 System5 System6 Fuel cell type PAFC PEMFC PEMFC MCFC McFC SOFC 00 71 3 3 4 10 200 250 2000 100 Demo Demo Demo Demo Demo 6 6 649 954 o 64 54 2 Heat recovery efficiency gt 65 C 30 4 19 5 23 7 24 0 IDAFC Phosphoric acid fuel cell Source Environmental Protection Agency 2002 10 0 PPEMFC Proton exchange membrane fuel cell 3 MICFC Molten carbonate fuel cell SOFC Solid oxide fuel cell Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating Systems Heating system type Ty
301. s GHG validation amp registration project financing legal amp accounting project development management and travel costs These costs are detailed below Contract negotiations If there is a decision to proceed with the project based on a positive result of the feasibility study the project proponent will need to establish a fiscal operating arrangement and negotiate a contract with one or more appropriate project stakeholders For power projects the Power Purchase Agreement PPA is one of the first required steps of the project development stage for non utility generators A PPA negotiation will be required if the project is to be owned privately rather than by a utility and will also involve legal and other professional advice e g finance accounting The scope of the work involved in the PPA negotiation will depend on whether or not conditions for the sale of power already exist e g utility policy to purchase private power The cost of contract negotiations for the proposed case project is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by experts to complete the necessary work The number of person days required can range between 0 and 30 person days or more depending on the complexity of the contract The cost of professional services required for the negotiation of a contract will range between 300 and 1 500 per person day Permits amp approvals A number of permits amp approvals might be required for the constr
302. s compressors absorption chillers etc all working under various operating conditions base load intermediate load and or peak load Eight worksheets Energy Model Load amp Network Design Load amp Network Equipment Selection Cost Analysis Greenhouse Gas Emission Reduction Analysis GHG Analysis Financial Summary Sensitivity and Risk Analysis Sensitivity and Tools are provided in the Combined Heat amp Power Project Workbook file The Energy Model Load amp Network and Equipment Selection worksheets are completed first The Cost Analysis worksheet should then be completed followed by the Financial Summary worksheet The GHG Analysis and Sensitivity worksheets are optional analyses The GHG Analysis worksheet is provided to help the user estimate the greenhouse gas GHG mitigation potential of the proposed project The Sensitivity worksheet is provided to help the user estimate the sensitivity of important financial indicators in relation to key technical and financial parameters The Tools worksheet is optional and is provided to help the user calculate certain inputs required to use the model such as the amount of landfill gas available for the project In general the user works from top down for each of the worksheets This process can be repeated several times in order to help optimise the design of the combined heat amp power project from an energy use and cost standpoint In addition to the worksheets that are require
303. s a guide The percentage of the intermediate load heating system 2 capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the intermediate load heating system 2 The percentage of the heating delivered by the intermediate load heating system 2 over the proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the intermediate load heating system 2 This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for heating systems range from 50 for a standard boiler or furnace with pilot light to 350 for a ground source heat pump Typical values of heating system efficiency ar
304. s an example a hospital will probably use 25 of its heating energy to heat domestic hot water while a typical office building might use only 10 of its heating energy to heat domestic hot water If no domestic hot water heating is required the user enters 0 Selecting process heating only without space heating for Base case heating system will hide this cell and the Equivalent degree days for DHW heating cell Equivalent degree days for DHW heating The model calculates the equivalent degree days for domestic hot water DHW heating While building heating is often calculated from climatic normals which are expressed in degree days the domestic hot water heating load is often expressed in degree days day Typical values for equivalent degree days for DHW heating range from 0 to 10 degree days day A low hot water heating requirement is equivalent to 2 degree days day while a high hot water heating requirement e g hospital is equivalent to 6 to 10 degree days day Selecting process heating only without space heating for Base case heating system will hide this cell and the Domestic hot water heating base demand cell Equivalent full load hours The model calculates the equivalent full load hours which is defined as the annual total heating demand divided by the total peak heating load for a specific location This value is expressed in hours and is equivalent to the number of hours that a heating system sized exactly for the peak hea
305. s are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC Reference Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered CO2 CH and N20 emission factors Standard analysis The model provides the CO CH and N O emission factors corresponding to the fuel types CHP 180 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model CO CH and N O emission factors represent the mass of greenhouse gas emitted per unit of energy generated Emission factors will vary for different types and qualities of fuels and for different types and sizes of equipment For each fuel type selected units are given in kilograms of gas emitted per gigajoule of energy generated kg GJ For more information on determining GHG emission factors see the revised IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories CO emission factors for many fuels are included on page 1 13 of the IPCC Reference Manual CH and N2O emission factors for a number of fuels are included on pages 1 35 and 1 36 of the IPCC Reference Manual In addition refer to the National Communications at the UNFCCC Website to see if more relevant emission factors are available for the country being considered Fuel consumption The model calculates the total fuel consumption for each fuel type This value is used in conjunction with the aggregate GHG emission factor to calculate
306. s the amount of energy required from the proposed case cooling system for space cooling including base load cooling and or for process CHP 53 RETScreen Software Online User Manual cooling after the implementation of the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures Proposed case district cooling network This section is used to prepare a preliminary design and cost estimate for the proposed case district cooling network Steel pipes used for district cooling are typically externally coated to prevent external corrosion Typical coating materials are bituminous epoxy or urethane For some soil conditions cathodic protection is added Typically the pipes are not insulated due to the small temperature difference between the soil and the water District cooling pipes can also be installed without expansion loops or devices A building cooling system design pressure is normally between 10 and 15 bar If a building is directly connected to the distribution system the operating pressure in the system needs be able to supply the static pressure for the building and being within the maximum allowed building pressure The pipe diameter varies depending on the cooling load of the system When pipe length is used in this section it refers to trench length with two pipes The heat gains for a district cooling system vary depending on many factors such as soil temperature and level moisture content In the RETScreen model heat gains h
307. se could take any value between 270 000 and 330 000 Since 300 000 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the fuel cost for the base case is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 Customer premium income rebate The customer premium income rebate is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet CHP 188 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The user enters the customer premium income rebate range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated customer premium income rebate value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the customer premium income rebate could take For example a range of 10 for customer premium income rebate of 300 000 means that the customer premium income rebate could take any value between 270 000 and 330 000 Since 300 000 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the customer premium income rebate is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should
308. selects the Energy Transfer Station ETS connection type from the drop down list If Direct connection type is selected the model sets the costs for energy transfer station to 75 of Indirect connection type If the Detailed costing method is selected the user enters these costs The building s cooling system is normally connected indirectly to the district cooling system via energy transfer stations located in the basement or where a chiller would normally be located Direct systems connect the district cooling system directly to the building s cooling system however there is still a cost associated to the connection of the system Energy transfer station s cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method then an energy transfer station s cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built in formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc CHP 57 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Main distribution line pipe cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method then a main distribution line pipe cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built in formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc Secondary distribution line pipe cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method the secondary distribution line pipe cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built i
309. ser must enter a year in each column provided and these years must be entered in chronological order Waste disposal rate The user enters the annual waste disposal rate corresponding to the benchmark year in the row above The model linearly extrapolates the annual waste disposal rates for all years in between those that are entered An annual waste disposal rate must be entered in each entry cell on this row Total waste in landfill x years The model calculates the total waste in the landfill over the life of the landfill from values entered by the user above CHP 205 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Landfill gas LFG Lag time before LFG generation The user enters the length of time in years expected between the time that waste is first placed in the landfill and the time that the initial generation of landfill gas from that waste actually occurs A typical lag time between the placement of waste and the start of LFG generation is 1 year Methane generation constant k The user enters the methane generation constant k which represents the first order biodegradation rate at which methane is generated following the placement of biodegradable wastes in the landfill This constant is influenced by moisture content the availability of nutrients pH and temperature The moisture content of the waste within a landfill is one of the most important parameters affecting the landfill gas generation rate Primarily th
310. ses by selecting a country region and fuel type in the two cells adjacent to the left If a blank value appears that indicates that no information is available for that selection The user can override these values by entering a value directly in the cell CHP 175 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent GHG emission factor Standard or Custom analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor for each fuel type considered Values are calculated based on the individual emission factors the electricity generation efficiency and the T amp D losses The weighted GHG emission factor for the total electricity mix is calculated on the bottom row of the table Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent GHG emission factor Simplified analysis The model calculates the GHG emission factor for the electricity system specified The value is calculated based on the GHG emission factor excl T amp D and the T amp D losses entered by the user Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent Baseline changes during project life The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not the baseline changes during the project life The project electricity generation baseline
311. sesseeseesees 232 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW sessesssesooesecsoesooesossoesooesosee 232 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW cccsccssscssssessseseeeees 233 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW csscssssssseseeeeeeees 233 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW ccsscsssessseseeeees 234 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW ccsssscsssssesseeees 234 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV lt 50 MW 235 CHP 4 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV lt 50 MW 235 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV gt 50 MW 236 Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle HHV gt 50 MW 236 Friel Cell CRAracteris tes ix ccisccessesssccccepscosseetnaceeteadesonsecasocncapsaoecsstbecasces anbsceasagsonccadesoase 237 Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Heating System ccssccsssccssssscssssccsescsssensees 237 Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling Systems cssscccsssscsssssccsssscssssssseesees 237 Building Heating Load Chart vecicsissscdicissscctscscsvsaessevecosisonetesavessscossesscieavesecevocesveucsscneees 238 Building Cooling Load Chart ssesssessscsssecssocesoossoocssoeessocesocesoosesocesscessocesocssoosessesssee 238 Com
312. sing the debt interest rate the debt term and the debt CHP 158 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Periodic costs credits The periodic costs and periodic credits are entered by the user in the Cost Analysis worksheet and are transferred here The model escalates the periodic costs and credits yearly according to the inflation rate starting from year 1 and throughout the project life From an income tax perspective periodic costs and credits are treated as operating expenses rather than capital investments and are therefore fully expensed in the year they are incurred End of project life cost credit The value of the project at the end of its life is entered by the user in the Cost Analysis worksheet and it is transferred here This amount is also commonly referred to as the salvage value or disposal value The salvage value entered is assumed to be representative of year 0 i e the development construction year prior to the first year of operation year 1 The model escalates the salvage value yearly according to inflation rate starting from year and up to the end of the project life i e the schedule year reported in the model For tax purposes the difference between the project salvage value and its undepreciated capital costs at the end of the project life is treated as income if positive and as a loss if negative Annual savings and income The total annual savings and income represents the a
313. sis The Click here to calculate risk analysis button updates the risk analysis calculations using the input parameter ranges specified by the user Clicking on this button starts a Monte Carlo simulation that uses 500 possible combinations of input variables resulting in 500 values of the selected financial indicator The impact graph the median the minimum and maximum confidence levels the distribution graph and the bar graph are calculated using these results and updated each time the user clicks on the button Click here to calculate risk analysis The risk analysis calculations can take up to 15 seconds to run depending on the Excel version and the speed of the computer When the risk analysis is updated the button disappears If the user makes any changes to the input range values or navigates through any of the other worksheets the button will reappear and the impact graph the distribution graph and the bar graph will be crossed out showing that the risk analysis calculations have to be updated The user will then have to click on the button to update the risk analysis calculations so that the results reflect the changes Impact graph The impact graph shows the relative contribution of the uncertainty in each key parameter to the variability of the financial indicator The X axis at the bottom of the graph does not have any units but rather presents a relative indication of the strength of the contribution of each parameter
314. sis The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not income tax should be factored into the financial analysis If the user ticks the box certain input fields will be added to allow the user to customize the income tax analysis according to the specific circumstances of the project In some situations the after tax return of a project can be more attractive than its pre tax return The income tax analysis allows the model to calculate after tax cash flows and after tax financial indicators In all cases the model assumes a single income tax rate valid throughout the project life and applied to net income Note that the analysis is based among others on net initial and annual costs i e any credits entered in the Cost Analysis worksheet for these two categories are not treated separately This leads to a reasonably accurate tax analysis unless the initial and or annual credits are of the same order of magnitude as the corresponding costs and fall under a different depreciation schedule for tax purposes Effective income tax rate The user enters the effective income tax rate which is the effective equivalent rate at which the net income and or savings derived from the project are taxed For example in most jurisdictions this would correspond to the combined federal provincial state and or local income tax rates for businesses Net taxable income is derived from the project cash inflows and outflows assuming that all revenues and expe
315. sonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the base load cooling system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for cooling systems range from 20 for steam jet refrigeration to 700 for compressors Typical values of cooling system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling Systems table Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Cooling delivered The model calculates cooling delivered by the base load cooling system The percentage of the cooling delivered by the base load cooling system over the proposed case cooling system energy demand is also calculated Peak load cooling system The peak load cooling system is designed to meet the remaining cooling demand not met by the base load cooling system either due to insufficient installed capacity or to cover scheduled shutdowns Type
316. sossesoe 258 CHP 6 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Estimated Substation COSIS jsscsenseveccessasceicedddonssersscnsgideeosseuteasesedeasoneaseussensensvesesusvesseue 258 Typical Installed Cost Range Power Equipment csscccsssscssssscsssccssssssseesees 259 Typical Installed Cost Range Heating Equipment ccsssccssssccssssccssssccsseseees 259 Typical Installed Cost Range Cooling Equipment sccsssccssssscsssscssssscssseseees 259 Registration Fees for CDM Projects sccsssccssssscssssscsssscsssssccssssccssssssssssssesssssensees 260 Emission Factors for Diesel Generator Systems in kg CO2equ k Wh for Three Different Levels of Load Factor cccccccsscscscccssescosscsccsessscscecssesssessssssessncsseseee 260 GHG Analysis Worksheet Flow Chart sccssssccsssscssssscssscccsssccssscsssssssssssssssecees 261 Range of k Values by Annual Precipitation c sccssssccssssccssssccsscssssscsssssssseecees 261 Fuel Required Average 5 5 ccicisiscinces sss videshiethacus pace nee eee oe 262 LEG Fuel POEM Al asses Gecccssseacsceousccnsceshenscaevoasesenssvasksouss cass souvogdsonsetusnssoeasceneoasionssanesaes 262 Remaining Fuel Required scitivsscscsscctecscavacaiesiccaccniasdeaitenctsaisdacecaseuductiivcsdsasccsesiaaacacies 263 Fuel Required amp Amul sseessisssssvcrecscesvevssenssyenesiesvecsseseuyscnnsseccessteneeevevevseeckeoynensvssevssneen
317. source The model automatically selects the base load cooling system fuel source For compressors if the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the fuel source For heat pumps if the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the fuel source For absorption and desiccant chillers if the proposed project includes heating the model automatically selects the heating system as the fuel source For free cooling the model automatically sets the fuel source to free cooling Note that the Proposed case system load characteristics graph can be used as a guide Fuel type The user selects the base load cooling system fuel type from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the base load cooling system Capacity The user enters the capacity of the base load cooling system The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the base load cooling system capacity over the proposed case cooling system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information CHP 69 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Sea
318. sscssssscssssscssssccssssccssssssssssssssssscoess 246 Desiccant Cooling System Schematic cccscccsssscsssssccsssscssssccssssccssssscssssccsssssssssees 246 Reciprocating Engine Schematic sccscoccssssssssssssssssssssscssscccsssscssscssssssssssssessensees 247 CHP 5 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Gas Turbin SchematiC s disses svasevasecused sects sessies eiaeia tas 247 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle SchematiC seessesssocesocessocssscsssecesocesocessocesseessecssosee 248 Steam Turbine Schematic esseseesossessossesossossesossossesoosoesessossesossossesoesossessossesossossssossossse 248 Piel Cell Schematics sosis oossoo saei si sassis sabiai se asiasia 249 Typical Reciprocating Engine Power Capacity e sseeesccescocesocessccesocesocecoocesoeessocssooee 249 Typical Steam Turbine Pressures and Temperatures sesssesssecssocesocesoocessesssoessooee 249 Typical Steam Turbine Efficiency sseessecesocescocssocsssccssocesocssoocesocessccssocesocesoosessesssee 250 Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Initial Superheat csccsseees 250 Steam Turbine Efficiency Correction Factor Back Pressure csssccssssssssseees 251 Heat Rate Correction Factor Altitude sesseseossesessossesossossesossoesessossesossossesossossesse 251 Heat Rate Correction Factor Specific Humidity cccsccssssccssssccssssccssssccsseees 252 Heat Rate Correction Factor Ambi
319. st standpoint and from the annual or recurring cost standpoint The user may refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required The most cost effective installations of combined cooling heating and or power CHP systems normally occur in new construction The second most cost effective installation is likely for retrofit situations when there are plans to either repair or upgrade an existing system However it is certainly possible that high cooling heating and or electricity costs or financial incentives could make the CHP system financially attractive even in retrofit situations that do not meet the above criteria Many times the availability of a low cost fuel will make the CHP project financially attractive While preparing the cost analysis for the proposed case CHP project it is important to consider that some items should be credited for material and labour costs that would have been spent on a conventional or base case system had the CHP project not been considered The user determines which initial cost items that should be credited It is possible that engineering and design and other development costs could also be credited as some of the time required for these items would have to be incurred for the base case system A Custom input cell is provided to allow project decision makers to keep track of these items when preparing the project cost a
320. st Examples Fuel Cell Installed Cost Examples Road construction An access road for construction and an on going service road is normally required for a medium to large scale power project These requirements will depend on the site selection and the nature of the terrain There might be seasonal limitations both for construction activity and for use of roads to transport equipment At some project sites there might be no need for road construction even if the site selected is not on existing routes The location of existing roads is a consideration during site selection Cost for road construction typically ranges from 0 to 80 000 per km but can be as high as 500 000 per km if river crossings are required The length of the road required comprises the length of the access road to the site and the length of the service road on the site The anticipated length of the required access and service roads can be determined by topographic maps Transmission line The transmission line cost is site specific and depends on the type length voltage and location of the line and the installed capacity of the power plant being developed The Estimated Transmission Line Costs table provides an indication of the approximate costs involved assuming reasonable access These costs are representative of aerial lines and should be adjusted based on site conditions Underground lines are normally used to connect the system within an urban area Their cos
321. ste for highly organic decomposable wastes A default value for Lo of 170 m of methane tonne of waste is recommended by the United States Environmental Projection Agency USEPA in their New Source Performance Guidelines NSPS Tier 1 default 1994 is considered to be a fairly conservative value which is representative of a CHP 206 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model majority of domestic and municipal solid waste landfills in the United States Selection of a different value for the methane generation from waste Lo should be based on the users specific knowledge and experience with the landfill site that is being assessed Inerts in waste adjustment factor The user enters the percentage of inert material in the waste An inert waste is one that does not contain an appreciable quantity of organic or biodegradable material e g construction and demolition wastes This adjustment factor is to be distinguished from the Methane generation from waste Lo value which already takes into consideration that a certain portion of municipal domestic solid waste as well as industrial commercial and institutional wastes does contain a fraction of inert material Unless there is a compelling case to the contrary i e a significant quantifiable portion of landfilled waste falls into the category of inert on a consistent annual basis the adjustment factor for the known inert waste quantities should be assigned a value of 0
322. stem load characteristics graph shows the proposed case average load profile for the power cooling and or heating systems on a monthly basis Base load cooling system Type The user selects the type of base load cooling system considered from the drop down list Cooling is typically provided by compressors heat pumps absorption chillers desiccant chillers or via free cooling Compressors are normally centrifugal reciprocating screw or scroll type and are typically driven by electricity If the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the compressor fuel source Otherwise the user selects the fuel type Heat pumps are often air source or ground source type and are typically driven by electricity If the proposed project includes power the model automatically selects the power system as the heat pump fuel source Otherwise the user selects the fuel type Absorption and desiccant chillers are typically driven by heat If the proposed project includes heating the model automatically selects CHP 68 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model the heating system as the absorption or desiccant fuel source Otherwise the user selects the fuel type For free cooling the model automatically sets the fuel source to free cooling See one of the following figures Compressor Cooling System Schematic Absorption Cooling System Schematic Desiccant Cooling System Schematic Fuel
323. system consists of only one building connected to the plant this pipe is considered to be a secondary line Main pipe network oversizing The user enters a pipe network oversizing factor The pipes are then automatically sized for a load that is increased by the oversizing factor entered by the user Pipe oversizing is used if it is expected that the system load will increase in the future For example if a community studied requires a 500 kW cooling system but there is a plan to add additional housing that would require an additional load of 50 kW an oversizing factor of 10 would ensure that the new housing can be connected at a later date The oversizing factor is also used to test how much extra load the selected system can accommodate This is achieved by changing the factor until the pipe size is increased If the pipe sizes change when the oversizing factor is 15 this indicates that the selected system can handle 15 more load without having to change the size of the pipes Pipe sections The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not a building cluster is connected to a section of the main distribution line The user also specifies the length of each section of the main distribution line The length refers to trench length with two pipes The model then calculates the total load connected to the section and selects the pipe size using the oversizing factor For more information see example in the Technical not
324. t can be 2 to 4 times higher than an equivalent aerial line The user enters the length of the transmission line and the cost per unit of length In areas of permafrost special soil conditions can increase the cost of line extension significantly Advice from an expert specialising in local transmission line design or construction might be required in order to estimate this cost CHP 129 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Substation The substation cost is site specific and depends mainly on the voltage and the installed capacity of the power plant being developed Auxiliary electrical equipment might also include such items as dump loads and heaters banks of capacitors monitoring equipment and integrated or SCADA type control systems The Estimated Substation Costs table provides an indication of the approximate costs involved assuming reasonable access The user calculates the total cost based on the substations and other auxiliary electrical equipment For smaller scale projects near to the electric distribution grid substation costs will likely be lower than presented in the table Energy efficiency measures The user enters the total installed cost for any additional power related energy efficiency measures for the project This value includes both equipment and installation costs As an example in Canada implementing power related energy efficiency measures to reduce the base case power system s annual peak load
325. t construction year year 0 for income tax purposes Annual costs and debt payments The total annual costs are calculated by the model and represent the yearly costs incurred to operate maintain and finance the project It is the sum of the O amp M fuel cost for the proposed case system and debt payments Note that the total annual costs include the reimbursement of the principal portion of the debt which is not strictly speaking a cost but rather an outflow of cash These costs are described briefly below O amp M The operation and maintenance O amp M costs are the sum of the annual costs that must be incurred to operate and maintain the energy system in excess of the O amp M cost required by the base case system The model uses the O amp M cost to calculate the total annual costs and the yearly cash flows Fuel cost Proposed case The model calculates the total fuel cost for the proposed case power heating and or cooling systems The annual value of fuel cost for the proposed case is escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate Debt payments debt term The model calculates the debt payments which is the sum of the principal and interest paid yearly to service the debt Whereas debt payments are constant over the debt term the principal portion increases and the interest portion decreases with time In that respect it is similar to the yearly annuity paid to reimburse the mortgage of a house Debt payments are calculated u
326. t electricity baseline does change the model indicates the year numbers for the first period GHG emission factors and for the second period GHG emission factors CHP 182 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Base case GHG emission The model transfers the total base case system GHG emission calculated in the base case system GHG summary section This value represents the amount of GHG emitted for the base case system Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco MWh which are equivalent Proposed case GHG emission The model transfers the total proposed case system GHG emission calculated in the proposed case system GHG summary section This value represents the amount of GHG emitted for the proposed case system Units switch The user can choose to express the emission factor in kgCO2 kWh or in tco2 MWh which are equivalent Gross annual GHG emission reduction The model calculates the gross annual reduction in GHG emissions estimated to occur if the proposed project is implemented The calculation is based on emissions of both the base case and the proposed case systems on an annual basis Units are given in equivalent tonnes of CO emissions per year tco2 yr GHG credits transaction fee The user enters the percentage of credits that will have to be paid annually as a transaction fee In order to obtain credits for a GHG project a portion of the credits mig
327. t of a CHP project can be up to 2 years or more The project management time not including the time to manage the feasibility study will involve between 0 2 and 4 person years at a rate of between 150 000 and 200 000 per person year depending on the scale of the project A reasonable estimate for project management is 10 of the cost of the total development activities However the investment in public relations will depend on the level of local support deemed necessary to achieve a successful implementation of the project For a large project involving many stakeholders and requiring an extensive number of permits and approvals additional public relations related project management costs of up to 150 000 per year is not unusual Travel amp accommodation A number of field visits and other trips will be required during the development phase primarily for meetings This cost item includes all travel related costs excluding time required to develop the project Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically cove
328. t proves to be uneconomic when compared with other energy options e Spend additional money and time on engineering to more clearly delineate potential project costs and to more precisely estimate the amount of energy produced or energy saved To overcome to some extent such conflicts the usual procedure is to advance the project through the following four stages e Pre feasibility analysis e Feasibility analysis e Development including financing and engineering e Construction and commissioning Each stage could represent an increase of a magnitude or so in expenditure and a halving of the uncertainty in the project cost estimate This process is illustrated for hydro projects in the Accuracy of Project Cost Estimates figure Gordon 1989 At the completion of each step a go or no go decision is usually made by the project proponent as to whether to proceed to the next step of the development process High quality but low cost pre feasibility and feasibility studies are critical to helping the project proponent screen out projects that do not make financial sense as well as to help focus development and engineering efforts prior to construction The RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software can be used to prepare both the initial pre feasibility analysis and the more detailed feasibility analysis Cost reference or Second currency The user selects the type of reference that will be used as a guide to help estimate
329. tal cost of electricity for the year the annual electricity demand and the average electricity rate for the year This electricity rate can be used for the base case and or proposed case system depending on the project circumstances Begin The user enters the begin date in day and month dd mm for the first season as defined by the electric utility rate structure The model then assumes that the remaining days not covered in the first season belong to the second season The user then enters the begin time for the various rate periods in this column The time can be entered using the 24 hour clock or by AM PM method 14 00 can also be entered as 2 PM End The user enters the end date in day and month dd mm for the first season as defined by the electric utility rate structure The model then assumes that the remaining days not covered in the first season belong to the second season CHP 214 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The user then enters the end time for the various rate periods in this column The time can be entered using the 24 hour clock or by AM PM method 14 00 can also be entered as 2 PM Hours The model calculates the number of hours in each rate period Capacity charge The user enters the capacity charge for the various rate periods for peak rates only Energy charge The user enters the energy charge for the various rate periods Average load The user enters the estimated aver
330. team anhydrous steam or steam gas Superheating of the steam also means that smaller size pipes can be used for the steam distribution system CHP 74 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Return temperature The user enters the return temperature or feedwater temperature for the steam boiler The return temperature is typically around 110 C Steam flow The model calculates the steam flow based on the capacity the superheated temperature and return temperature This value is another way to express the capacity Typically part of the steam flow is lost in the deaerator or to blowdown The amount of blowdown ranges from 2 to 10 and varies depending on type of blowdown system used automatic or manual and the quality of condensate return and of the water treatment system Fuel required The model calculates the fuel required per hour based on the capacity and seasonal efficiency Furnace Heater Heat pump Other Capacity The user enters the capacity of the heating system The System design graph displayed in the Energy Model worksheet can be used as a guide The percentage of the heating system capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calculated The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the heating system The percentage of the heating delivered by the heating system over t
331. ted Heating delivered The model calculates the heating delivered by the base load heating system The percentage of the heating delivered by the base load heating system over the proposed case heating system energy demand is also calculated Intermediate load heating system The user enters the information about the intermediate load heating system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet If no intermediate load power system has been specified the user can enter an intermediate heating load system in the Energy Model worksheet Type The user selects the type of the intermediate load heating system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet If no intermediate load power system has been specified the user can select the type of the intermediate heating load system in the Energy Model worksheet CHP 24 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Capacity The user enters the capacity of the intermediate load heating system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet If no intermediate load power system has been specified the user can enter the capacity of the intermediate heating load system in the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the intermediate load heating system capacity over the proposed case heating system peak load is calculated
332. ted value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the initial costs are known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 O amp M The annual operating and maintenance O amp M cost for the project is automatically transferred from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters the O amp M cost range The range is a percentage corresponding to the uncertainty associated with the estimated O amp M cost value The higher the percentage the greater the uncertainty The range determines the limits of the interval of possible values that the O amp M cost could take For example a range of 10 for an O amp M cost of 1 000 000 means that the O amp M cost could take any value between 900 000 and 1 100 000 Since 1 000 000 is the estimated value the risk analysis will consider this value as being the most probable and the minimum and maximum values as being the least probable based on a normal distribution If the O amp M cost is known exactly by the user no uncertainty the user should enter a range of 0 CHP 187 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Fuel cost Proposed case The annual fuel cost for the proposed case is transferred automatically from the Financial Summary worksheet to the Sensitivity worksheet The user enters th
333. tem components such as distribution piping and trenching and any building interconnection plumbing required In addition the cost for any cooling system related energy efficiency measures is also included The user may refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required These costs are detailed below Cooling equipment The user enters the installed cost per unit capacity for the proposed case cooling equipment The capacity in kW million Btu h or RT is copied automatically from the Energy Model worksheet to the Cost Analysis worksheet This value includes both equipment and installation costs Typically due to economies of scale the larger the capacity the lower the installed cost per unit capacity The user can refer to the RETScreen Online Product Database for supplier contact information in order to obtain prices or other information required See the following figure Typical Installed Cost Range Cooling Equipment Energy transfer station s The number of buildings and cost of the energy transfer station s is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet CHP 132 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Main cooling distribution line pipe The total length and cost of the main system piping is copied automatically from the Load amp Network worksheet Secondary cooling distribution line pipe The total len
334. thalpy of the steam at the input of the steam turbine Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat content of a substance Entropy The model calculates the entropy of the steam at the input of the steam turbine Entropy is a general measure of the thermodynamic potential of a system Extraction port The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not an extraction port is included Extraction ports are used to provide heat to a heating load at a higher grade than available from the back pressure port Maximum extraction The user enters the maximum extraction as a percentage of the steam flow The maximum allowable steam extraction varies depending on the equipment manufacturer and model Extraction The model calculates the amount of steam that can be extracted based on the maximum extraction and the steam flow Extraction pressure The user enters the steam turbine extraction pressure The higher the extraction pressure is the higher the heating capacity is at the extraction port and the lower the power capacity is and vice versa Temperature The model calculates the temperature of the extracted steam which is the saturation temperature at the extraction pressure Mixture quality The model calculates steam moisture mixture quality at the output of the extraction port If the mixture quality is below 1 0 the steam contains water i e the steam is wet CHP 89 RETScreen Software Online User M
335. the Amount column Balance of system amp miscellaneous The balance of system amp miscellaneous costs for the proposed case project typically includes a number of items such as specific project costs i e LFG collection system fuel handling system or custom building amp yard construction spare parts transportation training amp commissioning contingencies and interest during construction These costs are detailed below CHP 133 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Specific project costs The user selects the specific project costs to be entered from the drop down list LFG collection system In this section the user enters specific project costs related to the landfill gas LFG collection system The user should also refer to the Landfill gas tool on the Tools worksheet Note Much of the text on landfill gas is adapted from the Handbook for the Preparation of Landfill Gas to Energy Projects in Latin America and the Caribbean prepared Conestoga Rovers amp Associates Waterloo Ontario Canada on behalf of The World Bank Conestoga Rovers amp Associates also helped CETC Varennes develop the Landfill gas tool within RETScreen LFG collection field The user enters the cost for the landfill gas LFG collection field A network of vertical LFG extraction wells and or horizontal LFG collection trenches are installed into the waste to collect the LFG Vertical wells are typically installed in a landfil
336. the specific circumstances of the project Electricity premium rebate The user enters the annual electricity premium or rebate negative value as a percentage of the base case power system annual fuel cost This permits the user to apply rates that CHP 150 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model are either higher or lower than what is paid for electricity in the base case By selecting a positive value premium it means that the end user is willing to pay more for electricity delivered by the proposed case power system e g Green Power Premium By entering a negative value rebate it means that the electricity is sold for less than the base case electricity cost Electricity premium income rebate The model calculates the electricity premium income or rebate This value is calculated by multiplying the base case power system fuel cost by the electricity premium or rebate The annual value of the electricity premium income rebate is escalated at the fuel cost escalation rate Heating premium rebate The user enters the annual heating premium or rebate negative value as a percentage of the base case heating system annual fuel cost This permits the user to apply rates that are either higher or lower than what is paid for heating in the base case By selecting a positive value premium it means that the end user is willing to pay more for heating delivered by the proposed case heating system For exam
337. the intermediate load power system capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is calculated Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load by the intermediate load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load by the intermediate load power system over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid by the intermediate load power system in the Equipment Selection worksheet and it is copied automatically to the Energy Model worksheet Peak load power system The peak load power system is designed to meet the remaining electricity demand not met by the base load and or the intermediate load power systems either due to insufficient installed capacity or to cover scheduled shutdowns Type The user selects the peak load power system type considered from the drop down list Selecting Not required will hide the entire peak load power system section However if Not required is selected and the Suggested capacity by the model is greater than 0 this section will not hide and the calculations made by the model will not be accurate Fuel type The user selects the fuel type for the peak load power system from the drop down list Depending on the selection of Hig
338. the online manual of RETScreen International s PV 2000 Model x Default values CHP 260 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model GHG Analysis Worksheet Flow Chart Select simplified standard or custom analysis Determine if it is a potential CDM project and if so do simplified baseline methods apply Calculate baseline emission factor according to project type Determine if baseline changes during project life and if so modify baseline emission factor Calculate proposed case emission factor Determine if a GHG credits transaction fee applies Calculate net annual GHG emission reduction Range of k Values by Annual Precipitation Range of k values Annual Relatively Moderately Highly precipitation inert decomposable decomposable gt 1000mm 002 oos 009 CHP 261 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Fuel Required Average Landfill gas generation rate graph 100 GJ h 1960 1980 2000 2020 2040 Year Theoretical Potential Required LFG Fuel Potential Landfill gas generation rate graph GJ h 960 1980 2000 2020 2040 Year Theoretical Potential Required 9 000 8 000 6 000 5 000 A 4 000 3 000 2080 9 000 r 8 000 7 000 6 000 5 000 4 000 2 000 1 000 2080 h m3 m3 h CHP 262 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Remaining Fuel Requi
339. the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Seasonal efficiency The user enters the seasonal efficiency of the base case cooling system This value is generally lower than the steady state efficiency because it is calculated on a seasonal basis In other words the steady state efficiency is for full load conditions while the seasonal efficiency takes into consideration the lower efficiency part load conditions that occur during the year Typical values for seasonal efficiency for cooling systems range from 20 for steam jet refrigeration to 700 for compressors Typical values of cooling system efficiency are presented in the Typical Seasonal Efficiencies of Cooling Systems table Cooling load calculation Cooling load for building zone cluster The user enters the cooling load for the building the building zone or the building cluster If this value is not known e g from fuel bill the user can use the Tools Goal Seek function in Excel to easily calculate this value CHP 50 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The user can also refer to the Building Cooling Load Chart to estimate the cooling load per unit of cooled floor area This value depends on the cooling design temperature for the specific location and on the building insulation efficiency Typical values for cooling load range from 20 to 50 W m Peak process cooling load The use
340. then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Custom These input cells are provided to allow the user to enter cost or credit items that are not included in the information provided in the above cost category A cost item may be entered in the grey input cell by overwriting the word Custom The user then selects cost from the drop down list in the unit column The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost This item is provided to allow for project technology and or regional differences not specifically covered in the generic information provided A credit item may also be entered in the grey input cell The user then selects credit from the drop down list in the unit column The project may be credited for material and or labour costs that would have been spent on the base case or conventional energy system The user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column CHP 137 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Building amp yard construction The user enters the building amp yard construction cost per unit area The user should obtain
341. tically in the Financial Summary worksheet Total peak cooling load The model calculates the annual total peak cooling load for the building the building zone or the building cluster This is the instantaneous cooling required from the base case cooling system to meet the largest space cooling load including base load cooling and or process cooling load It typically coincides with the warmest day of the year for space cooling applications This value is copied automatically in the Financial Summary worksheet Fuel consumption unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel type selected for each building zone or building cluster Fuel consumption annual The model calculates the annual fuel consumption for the building the building zone or the building cluster Fuel rate unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel type selected for each building zone or building cluster CHP 52 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the type of fuel consumed by the base case cooling system Fuel cost The model calculates the fuel cost for the base case cooling system This value is copied automatically in the Financial Summary worksheet Proposed case energy efficiency measures End use energy efficiency measures The user enters the percent of the base case cooling system s total peak cooling load that is reduced as a result of im
342. ting load would operate at rated capacity to meet the annual total heating demand Typical values for the equivalent full load hours range from 1 500 to 4 200 hours for space heating The upper range increases if the system has a high domestic hot water heating load or process heating load Monthly inputs The user enters the monthly degree days below 18 C 65 F The monthly degree days are the sum of the degree days for each day of the month Degree days for a given day represent the number of Celsius degrees that the mean temperature is above or below a CHP 34 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model given base Thus heating degree days are the number of degrees below 18 C The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displayed Base case heating system The user selects the heating load type from the drop down list Technical note on heating network design The purpose of this technical note is to provide the user with a sample design of a district heating network used within the RETScreen model The example described below refers to the values presented in the Base case heating system section example and the Proposed case district heating network section example In a state of the art district heating system thermal energy in the form of hot water is distri
343. tion Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if the equipment is not operated at maximum output for most of the year The heat rate for gas turbines varies also depending on the location i e altitude humidity and temperature See one of the following figures CHP Plant Heat Rate amp Heat Recovery Efficiency Calculation Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV lt 5 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 5 to 50 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines LHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines HHV 50 to 300 MW Typical Heat Rates for Gas Turbines Combined Cycle LHV
344. to local conditions using the cost factors and the exchange rate in the cells below Energy transfer station s connection type The user selects the Energy Transfer Station ETS connection type from the drop down list If Direct connection type is selected the model sets the costs for energy transfer station to 75 of Indirect connection type If the Detailed costing method is selected the user enters these costs The building s heating system is normally connected indirectly to the district heating system via energy transfer stations located in the basement or where a boiler would normally be located Direct systems connect the district heating system directly to the building s heating system however there is still a cost associated to the connection of the system Energy transfer station s cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method then an energy transfer station s cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built in formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc Main distribution line pipe cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method then a main distribution line pipe cost factor can be entered This factor is used to modify the built in formula to compensate for local variations in construction costs inflation etc Secondary distribution line pipe cost factor If the user selects the Formula costing method the secondary distribut
345. to take advantage of clean energy production credits This information will be used in the Financial Summary calculations CHP 32 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Load amp Network Design As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software the Load amp Network Design worksheet is used to estimate the heating cooling and or power loads for the base case and proposed case systems This worksheet can also be used to prepare a preliminary design and cost estimate for the district heating and or cooling networks Heating project Site conditions Nearest location for weather data The user enters the weather station location with the most representative weather conditions for the project This is for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information Heating design temperature The user enters the heating design temperature in Celsius degrees which represents the minimum temperature that has been measured for a frequency level of at least 1 over the year for a specific area ASHRAE 1997 The heating design temperature is used to determine the heating demand The user can consult the RETScreen Online Weather Database for more information Typical values for heating design temperature range from approximately 40 to 15 C If the user selects imperial units at the top of the Energy Model worksheet F equivalent values will also be displaye
346. tribution line sizing section Summary of main distribution line pipe length The model calculates the total length of the main pipe for each pipe diameter Summary of main distribution line pipe cost If the user selects the Formula costing method then the model calculates the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories using the Typical Costs for Heating Distribution Line Pipes graph If the Detailed costing method is selected then the user enters the main distribution line pipe cost by pipe size categories The model then calculates the total cost for all the main distribution line The costs shown are for the supply and installation of the supply and return pipes i e 2 pipes per meter of trench The cost per meter is for two pre insulated district heating type pipes in a trench approximately 600 mm deep It also includes the cost for the replacement of existing sidewalks Rocky terrain or installations in areas that have many CHP 46 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model old utility services e g telephone electricity sewage water etc could increase the calculated cost substantially Typical main distribution line pipe costs can be broken down as follows 45 for material 45 for installation and 10 for associated distribution pump system Total district heating network cost The model calculates the total district heating network cost which includes the total cost of secondary
347. tricity generation efficiency of 35 which indicates that 35 of the heat content of the coal is transformed into electricity fed to the grid Units are given as a percentage of primary heat potential gigajoules of heat to actual power plant output gigajoules of electricity Fuel types which emit no GHGs e g solar have a default value of 100 T amp D losses The user enters the transmission and distribution T amp D losses of the base case electricity system which includes all energy losses between the power plant and the end user This value will vary based on the voltage of transport lines the distance from the site of energy production to the point of use peak energy demands ambient temperature and electricity theft In addition T amp D system type e g AC vs DC and quality may also influence losses The model calculates the weighted average of the T amp D losses of the global electricity mix on the bottom row of the table Units are given as a percentage of all electricity losses to electricity generated As a first estimate it is reasonable to assume T amp D losses of 8 to 10 in modern grids in industrialised countries and 10 to 20 in grids located in developing countries GHG emission factor excl T amp D The user enters the GHG emission factor excluding transmission and distribution T amp D losses for the base case electricity system specified The user can obtain GHG emission factors excluding T amp D los
348. truction short term construction financing will vary depending on the duration of construction and the cost of money Although the construction of a CHP project can take up to two years normally not more than 12 months are required between building or infrastructure construction delivery of the equipment one of the most important cost items and commissioning of the system The user enters the interest rate and the length of construction in months The interest during construction is then calculated assuming the average debt over the project length in months is 50 of the subtotal of all project costs For example if 1 million worth of equipment must be financed over 12 months at an annual rate of 10 the user should enter 10 as the interest rate during construction the calculated interest cost during construction is 1 000 000 x 50 x 12 months 12 months year x 10 year 50 000 The cost of interest during construction can vary between 3 and 15 of the project costs Annual costs credits There will be a number of annual costs associated with the operation of a proposed case project These could include land lease property taxes insurance premium parts amp labour GHG monitoring amp verification community benefits and general amp administrative expenses In addition costs for contingencies and fuel consumption will also be incurred These costs are detailed below O amp M Land lease The user enters the applica
349. ty ST without extraction 92 Power capacity without extraction 97 Power equipment ee eeeeteeseetecreeeeeneeeeeeeees 128 Power for cooling ce ceceseesessecreeeecneeeeeeeeeees 65 Power gross average load 0 0 eee 62 217 Power Load Following 06 6 112 253 Power net average load 62 65 80 83 85 97 100 101 107 Power Only Project sses 4 17 224 Power PLOjeCta ow eee eee rar i 60 Power SYStOM 0 eeeeeeeereeeseeeeee 65 111 128 157 Power system fuel eceeceesseeseeseeeeeeeeenees 111 Power system 10ad 0 eee eeeeeseceseeeeeseeeeee 65 Power System Load Definition Base amp Peak Load aanne 4 18 79 228 Power System Load Definition Base Intermediate amp Peak Load 4 18 79 111 228 Pre feasibility or Feasibility analysis 113 Preliminary design eeeseeesecseeeeceeeeeeees 119 Preparation equipment 00 eee eee eeeeeeeeee 136 Prela ee re esse ieee ees 160 161 163 Pre tax Internal Rate of Return assets 161 Pre tax Internal Rate of Return equity 160 Printing ates csasuu eases oiele tien tees 13 Process cooling demand eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 Process cooling load characteristics 51 63 Process heating demand eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeees 38 Process heating load characteristics 37 63 Product data s a i 220 Project costs and savings income summary 145 152 154 155
350. ty is assumed to occur at the end of year O and that year 1 is the first year of operation of the project Annual costs and savings income given in the Financial Summary worksheet which reflect amounts valid for year 0 are thus escalated one year in order to determine the actual costs and savings income incurred during the first year of operation i e year 1 Cumulative The model calculates the cumulative cash flows which represent the net after tax flows accumulated from year 0 It uses the net flows to calculate the cumulative flows Cumulative cash flows graph The cumulative cash flows are plotted versus time in the cash flows graph These cash flows over the project life are calculated in the model and reported in the yearly cash flows table Blank Worksheets 3 These worksheets are provided to allow the user to prepare a customised RETScreen project analysis For example the worksheets can be used to enter more details about the project to prepare graphs to perform a more detailed sensitivity analysis and to create a custom database The user may also use these worksheets to develop a companion model to RETScreen CHP 164 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Greenhouse Gas GHG Emission Reduction Analysis As part of the RETScreen Clean Energy Project Analysis Software a GHG Analysis worksheet is provided to help the user estimate the greenhouse gas emission reduction mitigation potential of the
351. ual amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Minimum capacity The user enters the minimum power capacity that the power equipment can operate at as a percentage of the Power capacity entered above This value is compared with the monthly Power net average load for the proposed case system as calculated in the Load amp Network worksheet If the minimum capacity exceeds the power net average load for any months the user should adjust this value until the minimum capacity is always maintained One way to do this is to have several smaller units with the same total power capacity combined running in parallel CHP 100 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Typical minimum capacity for steam turbines is 40 Power capacity The model calculates the power capacity The percentage of the power capacity over the proposed case power system peak load is also calculated Electricity delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Electricity exported to grid The model calculates the electricity exported to the grid based on the Operating strategy selected in the Operating strategy section at the bottom of this worksheet Fuel cell Fuel
352. uality is below 1 0 the steam contains water i e the steam is wet Typically a steam turbine requires a minimum mixture quality in the range of 0 90 to 0 95 If the mixture quality is too low there could be erosion of the steam turbine blades due to the collision of the water droplets and the turbine blades thus increasing the cost of maintenance of the power system Increasing the back pressure increases the mixture quality If the back pressure cannot be increased more than one steam turbine has to be used in conjunction with a reheater or a moisture separator This will help reduce ongoing maintenance costs but will increase the initial cost of equipment Enthalpy The model calculates the enthalpy of the steam at the output of the back pressure port Enthalpy is a general measure of the heat content of a substance Theoretical steam rate TSR The model calculates the theoretical steam rate TSR of the back pressure steam which represents the theoretical amount of steam necessary to produce 1 kWh of power Steam turbine ST efficiency The user enters the steam turbine ST efficiency This value includes the losses in the steam turbine for auxiliary power and system losses Typical values for steam turbine efficiency range from 70 to 80 Large steam turbines typically have higher efficiencies than small steam turbines The turbine efficiency varies depending on the back pressure and the difference between the superheated and s
353. uce the time and costs associated with establishing the baseline for the project but in most cases will reduce the accuracy of the baseline calculations RETScreen includes electricity generation GHG emission factors for a number of countries Potential CDM project The Kyoto Protocol has established three mechanisms the Clean Development Mechanism CDM Joint Implementation JI and Emissions Trading that allow Parties to pursue opportunities to cut emissions or enhance carbon sinks abroad The cost of curbing emissions varies considerably from region to region and therefore makes economic sense to cut emissions where it is cheapest to do so given that the impact on the atmosphere is the same The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not the project is to be evaluated as a potential CDM project The user should tick the box if the project is located in a developing country and it has good potential to meet the requirements for CDM projects These requirements are described in brief below and covered in detail at the UNFCCC s CDM Website The user should not tick the box for any other domestic or international GHG reduction projects including ones that might qualify for Joint Implementation JI requirements are also described in brief below If the user ticks the box RETScreen automatically assesses by checking values calculated on other RETScreen worksheets whether or not the project can be considered as a small scale CDM p
354. uction of the project These include environmental approvals e g federal national or state provincial regional authorisations regarding the use of land e g state provincial regional or local air traffic e g federal national building permits e g state provincial regional or local use of water resource e g state provincial regional use of navigable waters e g federal national and operating agreements e g state provincial regional or local Other agencies include local building and electrical inspectors boiler inspectors fire safety inspectors forestry fuel supply and an emissions regulating authority For a large project environmental approvals are likely to be the longest and most costly authorisations to obtain The cost of acquiring the necessary permits and approvals is calculated based on an estimate of the time required by an expert to complete the necessary work For CHP projects it can involve between 0 and 400 person days depending on the scale location and complexity of the project Rates of between 300 and 1 000 per day are common CHP 122 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model The time required depends on the number of agencies involved and what is specifically required to meet their rules and regulations The user can also add to the number of days or unit costs an amount to cover the actual permit itself Permit fees are usually minor relative to the total project cost Site sur
355. ue NPV of the project which is the value of all future cash flows discounted at the discount rate in today s currency NPV is related to the internal rate of return IRR NPV is thus calculated at a time 0 corresponding to the junction of the end of year 0 and the beginning of year 1 Under the NPV method the present value of all cash inflows is compared against the present value of all cash outflows associated with an investment project The difference between the present value of these cash flows called the NPV determines whether or not the project is generally a financially acceptable investment Positive NPV values are an indicator of a potentially feasible project In using the net present value method it is necessary to choose a rate for discounting cash flows to present value As a practical matter organisations put much time and study into the choice of a discount rate The model calculates the NPV using the cumulative after tax cash flows In cases where the user has selected not to conduct a tax analysis the NPV calculated will be that of the pre tax cash flows Annual life cycle savings The model calculates the annual life cycle savings which is the levelized nominal yearly savings having exactly the same life and net present value as the project The annual life cycle savings are calculated using the net present value the discount rate and the project life Benefit Cost B C ratio The model calculates the net Benefit Cost B
356. uel consumption for the fuel types selected Fuel rate unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel types selected Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit fuel for the fuel types Fuel cost The model calculates the annual fuel cost for the fuel types by multiplying the fuel rate by the annual fuel consumption The total cost for the entire fuel mix is also calculated Multiple fuels percentage CHP 77 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Selecting Multiple fuels percentage allows the user to select up to 3 different fuel types from the fuel type list The user then enters the fuel mix for the 3 fuel types Fuel type The user selects a fuel type from the drop down list for Fuel type 1 Fuel type 2 and or Fuel type 3 Depending on the selection of Higher or Lower heating value at the top of the Energy Model worksheet the relevant heating value will be used for the calculations Fuel mix The user enters the fuel mix for each fuel type selected Note that the user should verify that the sum of all fuel listed in the fuel mix column equals 100 Fuel consumption unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel types selected Fuel consumption The model calculates the annual fuel consumption for the fuel types selected Fuel rate unit The model displays the unit used for the fuel types selected Fuel rate The user enters the fuel rate price per unit
357. uel required over the average fuel required is also calculated See the following figure Remaining Fuel Required Fuel required annual The model calculates the annual landfill gas fuel required for the proposed case energy project See the following figure Fuel Required Annual LFG fuel potential annual The model calculates the annual LFG fuel potential which is the annual average amount of landfill gas generated from waste in the landfill site and that is collected by the landfill gas collection system See the following figure LEG Fuel Potential Annual Landfill gas generation rate graph The Landfill gas generation rate graph shows the theoretical and potential landfill gas generation rate of the landfill as well as the landfill gas fuel required by the energy project over the lives of both the landfill and the energy project CHP 209 RETScreen Software Online User Manual GHG analysis LFG system Base case The user selects the type of base case landfill gas collection system from the drop down list Not collected and Flared Percent of LFG flared Base case The user enters the amount of landfill gas flared in the base case scenario This value is used to calculate the base case GHG emissions from the landfill site LFG flared Base case The model calculates the annual average amount of landfill gas flared in the base case scenario during the energy project life LFG flared
358. uired average s es 208 Fuel Required Average 7 208 262 Fuel selection method c cecceseeseeeeeeees 76 Fuel SONCE r pneter sirenen ein anin s 30 69 71 Fuel source Fuel type seeeeseeeseeeereeererereren 30 Fuel type 20 25 27 30 36 50 61 69 71 76 77 78 173 175 177 180 196 197 198 200 201 204 211 212 Full Power Capacity Output 6 112 253 UM ACE isso O E seoeesep es Sauce acpecsee sapanseh segs 75 G Gas t rbe sssaaa enese hiini 82 85 88 Gas turbine combined cycle 00 eee 85 88 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle Schematic 6 85 88 248 Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples lt SMW 6 129 256 Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 5 to DOM W sccectseestvccseeeedebiseeterbewsteveennes 6 129 257 CHP 272 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model Gas Turbine Installed Cost Examples 50 to SOOM M ibs sisccseedests sesvntedsasonmcebiete tes 6 129 257 Gas Turbine Schematic 0 cee 6 82 247 General ene e rr 121 142 143 145 General amp administrative 0 ccccccceeeeeeeee 142 Geothermal system eee eeeeeeceeeeeseeees 99 GHG analySis nn a 166 210 GHG Analysis Worksheet Flow Chart7 166 261 GHG baseline study amp monitoring plan 119 GHG credits transaction fee 163 183 184 GHG emission119 142 154 163 165 166 167 169 171 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 21
359. umns hides The user might choose this option for example to minimise the amount of information printed in the final report If the user selects Custom 1 or any of the other 5 selections the user may manually enter quantity and cost information that is specific to the region in which the project is located and or for a different cost base year This selection thus allows the user to customise the information in the Quantity range and Unit cost range columns The user can also overwrite Custom 1 to enter a specific name e g Japan 2005 for a new set of unit cost and quantity ranges in the cell next to the drop down list The user may also evaluate a single project using different quantity and cost ranges selecting a new range reference Custom 1 to Custom 5 enables the user to keep track of different cost scenarios Hence the user may retain a record of up to 5 different quantities and cost ranges that can be used in future RETScreen analyses and thus create a localised cost reference database Second currency The user selects the second currency this is the currency in which a portion of a project cost item will be paid for in the second currency specified by the user This second unit of currency is displayed in the Foreign amount column If the user selects the unit of currency shown in the Foreign amount column is Selecting User defined allows the user to specify the currency manually by entering a name
360. unt future cash flows in order to obtain their present value The rate generally viewed as being most appropriate is an organisation s weighted average cost of capital An organisation s cost of capital is not simply the interest rate that it must pay for long term debt Rather cost of capital is a broad concept involving a blending of the costs of all sources of investment funds both debt and equity The discount rate used to assess the financial viability of a given project is sometimes called the hurdle rate the cut off rate or the required rate of return The model uses the discount rate to calculate the annual life cycle savings For example North American electric utilities currently use discount rates ranging anywhere from 3 to 18 with 6 to 11 being the most common values Project life The user enters the project life year which is the duration over which the financial viability of the project is evaluated Depending on circumstances it can correspond to the life expectancy of the energy equipment the term of the debt or the duration of a power purchase agreement The model can analyse project life s up to 50 years Finance Incentives and grants The user enters the financial incentive this is any contribution grant subsidy etc that is paid for the initial cost excluding credits of the project In the model the incentive is deemed not to be refundable and is treated as income during the development construction ye
361. urbine Duct firing The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not duct firing is used The exhaust from a gas turbine contains large amounts of excess air with oxygen content close to fresh air The exhaust can be utilised as preheated combustion air for duct firing thus increasing the heating capacity at the input of the steam turbine Also duct firing may be used in the case of gas turbine shutdown or in the case of temporary heating load swings The model assumes that the fuel type used for duct firing is the same as for the gas turbine Duct firing heating capacity The user enters the duct firing heating capacity which represents the burner capacity The efficiency of the burners used for duct firing is about 100 CHP 87 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heating capacity after duct firing The model calculates the heating capacity after duct firing which is the amount of heat available in the duct for the heat recovery steam generator HRSG after the duct firing Steam turbine Gas turbine combined cycle GTCC power systems produce electricity for the power load using a gas turbine and a generator as well as a steam turbine and generator using heat recovered from the gas turbine s exhaust gas using a heat recovery steam generator HRSG Heat can be recovered from the steam turbine ST extraction port and back pressure port for the heating load Refer to the Gas Turbine Combine
362. user can input both a quantity amount and unit cost Note that the credit item is expressed as a negative value in the Amount column Development Once the proposed case project has been identified through the feasibility study to be desirable to implement project development activities follow For some projects the feasibility study development and engineering activities might proceed in parallel depending on the risk and return acceptable to the project proponent For CHP projects with district heating and or cooling there are a number of possible project developers Currently a common approach is for the client to be the building owner with the developer being the local fuel and or main equipment supplier who provides complete design build services General contractors may also be the developer purchasing the fuel and or cooling heating and or power systems on behalf of the building owner It is also possible that an Energy Services Company ESCO or the local CHP 121 RETScreen Software Online User Manual community utility or public works department could be the project developer where they purchase the fuel and or CHP system and sell the energy to local building owners Estimating the costs of the development phase depends on the particular development arrangement established Project development activities typically includes cost for such items as contract negotiations permits amp approvals site survey amp land right
363. user selects the custom type of analysis different values from the default values provided may be entered by the user Researchers have assigned Global Warming Potentials GWPs to greenhouse gases to allow for comparisons of their relative heat trapping effect The higher the global warming potential of a gas the greater the contribution to the greenhouse effect For example nitrous oxide is 310 times more effective than carbon dioxide at trapping heat in the atmosphere GWPs of gases are defined as a unit multiple of that given to carbon dioxide CO3 which is assigned a reference value of 1 1 e the GWP of CO is 1 and the GWP of N O is 310 The default values are those defined by the Revised Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change IPCC Guidelines for Greenhouse Gas Inventories 1996 Base case electricity system Baseline To perform the RETScreen GHG emission reduction analysis for the project the user needs to define the baseline also called base case or reference case electricity system The user selects the type of analysis from the three options Simplified analysis Standard analysis and Custom analysis Standard analysis uses many pre defined parameters in the calculations whereas the Custom analysis requires that the user enter these parameters The user selects the type of analysis in the Settings section at the top of the GHG Analysis worksheet The user will typically select Simplified analysis if electricity gen
364. utilisateur choisit une langue a partir de la liste d roulante Currency To perform a RETScreen project analysis the user may select a currency of their choice from the Currency cell in the Energy Model worksheet The user selects the currency in which the monetary data of the project will be reported For example if the user selects all monetary related items are expressed in Selecting User defined allows the user to specify the currency manually by entering a name or symbol in the additional input cell that appears adjacent to the currency switch cell The currency may be expressed using a maximum of three characters US etc To facilitate the presentation of monetary data this selection may also be used to reduce the monetary data by a factor e g reduced by a factor of a thousand hence k 1 000 instead of 1 000 000 If None is selected all monetary data are expressed without units Hence where monetary data is used together with other units e g kWh the currency code is replaced with a hyphen kWh CHP 15 RETScreen Software Online User Manual The user may also select a country to obtain the International Standard Organisation ISO three letter country currency code For example if Afghanistan is selected from the currency switch drop down list all project monetary data are expressed in AFA The first two letters of the country currency code refer to the name of the country AF for
365. valuate the project twice once including the value of the carbon credits and the associated transaction costs and once without and then compare the results The procedure to follow is presented in the RETScreen GHG Analysis Worksheet Flow Chart Settings GHG analysis The user indicates by ticking the box whether or not the optional GHG Analysis worksheet is used to conduct an analysis of GHG emission reduction If the user ticks the box the user should complete the GHG Analysis worksheet Certain input fields will be added to the Financial Summary worksheet in order to calculate the GHG reduction income If the user does not tick the box the user should then go directly to the Financial Summary worksheet Simplified Standard or Custom analysis The user selects the type of analysis from the three options Simplified analysis Standard analysis and Custom analysis Standard analysis uses many pre defined parameters in the calculations whereas the Custom analysis requires that the user enter these parameters The user will typically select Simplified analysis if electricity generation emission factors are already known GHG emissions factors for electricity generation for some CHP 166 RETScreen Combined Heat amp Power Project Model jurisdictions might be calculated on an aggregate basis to help simply the preparation of GHG calculations This simplified method for calculating the baseline for a project can red
366. vey amp land rights The requirement to survey the site will depend in large part on the status of the site ownership zoning and site use planning location size and possible legal and insurance issues Land rights are required for the land on which the proposed case project is located including the service road transmission and collection lines substation and O amp M building Right of way might be granted for the access road electric lines and the district heating and or cooling network if applicable The land required for the project infrastructure might be leased or purchased Typically the costs to survey one simple lot of 1 to 10 hectares are of the order of 750 As an example a 40 MW biomass fired CHP plant will typically require 2 to 5 hectares whereas a single small packaged gas turbine less than 100 kW micro turbine will likely require less than 20 m The cost may vary if travel and accommodation costs are billed by a surveyor Depending upon the CHP project size a site survey can take approximately 0 to 5 days to complete at a daily rate of 400 to 1 000 per day The user enters the total estimated cost of purchasing the required land that cannot be leased or used under a right of way agreement The cost should include an allowance for legal fees Note that the estimated cost of negotiating any land lease and rights of way agreements should be included under the Permits amp approvals section described above GHG validati
367. y delivered to load The model calculates the electricity delivered to the load by the peak load power system The percentage of the electricity delivered to the load by the peak load power system over the proposed case power system energy demand is also calculated Manufacturer The user enters the name of the equipment manufacturer for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information Model The user enters the name of the equipment model for reference purposes only The user can consult the RETScreen Online Product Database for more information CHP 21 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Heat rate The user enters the heat rate of the peak load power system The heat rate is the amount of energy input in kJ or Btu from the fuel required to produce 1 kWh of electricity This value is another way of entering the electricity generation efficiency and is common practice in industry The following figures provide average heat rates at International Standards Organization ISO standard conditions of 15 C 59 F 1 atmosphere 101 3 kPa and 60 relative humidity typically used by manufacturers The heat rates are typically quoted in lower heating value The figures show the heat rates based on natural gas for higher heating value HHV and lower heating value LHV The heat rate normally varies over the operating range of the equipment and this should be considered if
368. y load The model calculates the annual net peak electricity load which is the amount of power load required to meet the largest electricity load excluding electricity used for heating and or cooling after the proposed case end use implementation of energy efficiency measures Net electricity demand The model calculates the annual net electricity demand which is the amount of energy required to run all the electricity loads excluding electricity used for heating and or cooling after the implementation of the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures Proposed case load characteristics This section summarises the monthly loads and the annual peak load for the proposed case power cooling and or heating systems These loads are calculated with respect to the base case system and the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures and the type of cooling system equipment selected in the Equipment Selection worksheet Power net average load The model calculates the net monthly average power load for the proposed case power system by multiplying the base case power system net average power load on a monthly basis by the proposed case end use energy efficiency measures for power Power for cooling The model calculates the monthly average power load required by the cooling system equipment selected in the Equipment Selection worksheet Power system load The model calculates the monthly average power system load for the propos
369. ystem is designed as a low temperature supply system i e below 95 C Note If the system consists of only one building connected to the plant this pipe is considered to be a secondary line CHP 41 RETScreen Software Online User Manual Main pipe network oversizing The user enters a pipe network oversizing factor The pipes are then automatically sized for a load that is increased by the oversizing factor entered by the user Pipe oversizing is used if it is expected that the system load will increase in the future For example if a community studied requires a 500 kW heating system but there is a plan to add additional housing that would require an additional load of 50 kW an oversizing factor of 10 would ensure that the new housing can be connected at a later date The oversizing factor is also used to test how much extra load the selected system can accommodate This is achieved by changing the factor until the pipe size is increased If the pipe sizes change when the oversizing factor is 15 this indicates that the selected system can handle 15 more load without having to change the size of the pipes Pipe sections The user indicates by selecting from the drop down list whether or not a building cluster is connected to a section of the main distribution line The length refers to trench length with two pipes The user also specifies the length of each section of the main distribution line The model then calculates the

RETScreen Software Online User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents